QSC TouchMix-16 User Manual

TouchMix™
User Manual
TouchMix-30 Pro Firmware Version 2.0
TouchMix-16 Firmware Version 3.0
TouchMix-8 Firmware Version 3.0
1001108-01-F
*1001108-01*
®
EXPLANATION OF TERMS AND SYMBOLS
The term “WARNING!” indicates instructions regarding personal safety. If the instructions are not followed the result may be bodily injury or death.
The term “CAUTION!” indicates instructions regarding possible damage to physical equipment. If these instructions are not followed, it may result in
damage to the equipment that may not be covered under the warranty.
The term “IMPORTANT!” indicates instructions or information that are vital to the successful completion of the procedure.
The term "NOTE" is used to indicate additional useful information.
The intent of the lightning flash with arrowhead symbol in a triangle is to alert the user to the presence of un-insulated "dangerous"
voltage within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to humans.
The intent of the exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is to alert the user to the presence of important safety, and operating
and maintenance instructions in this manual.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
Maximum ambient operating temperature is 40°C (104°F).
WARNING!: DO NOT LEAVE THE TouchMix-8 / TouchMix-16 POWER SUPPLY UNATTENDED WHEN PLUGGED IN. Always unplug
the power supply from the electric outlet immediately after use.
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Do not submerge the apparatus in water or liquids.
7. Do not use any aerosol spray, cleaner, disinfectant or fumigant on, near or into the apparatus.
8. Clean only with a dry cloth.
9. Do not block any ventilation opening. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
10. Keep all ventilation openings free of dust or other matter.
11. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
12. To reduce the risk of electrical shock, the power cord shall be connected to a mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection.
13. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding‑type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A
grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
14. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
15. Do not unplug the unit by pulling on the cord, use the plug.
16. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
17. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
18. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power‑supply
cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
19. The appliance coupler, or the AC Mains plug, is the AC mains disconnect device and shall remain readily accessible after installation.
20. Adhere to all applicable, local codes.
21. Consult a licensed, professional engineer when any doubt or questions arise regarding a physical equipment installation.
22. Inspect the apparatus, including the power supply for signs of external wear and tear or signs of damage. All damage to the apparatus should
be immediately repaired by a QSC authorized service station or QSC International Distributor. Failure to perform necessary repairs could lead
to additional damage or to safety hazards. Failure to perform necessary repairs voids the limited warranty and QSC is not responsible for any
injury, harm or related damages arising from any failure to perform those repairs.
1001108-01-F
ii
Maintenance and Repair
WARNING!: Advance technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and powerful electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance
and repair methods. To avoid a danger of subsequent damage to the apparatus, injuries to persons and/or the creation of additional
safety hazards, all maintenance or repair work on the apparatus should be performed only by a QSC authorized service station or an
authorized QSC International Distributor. QSC is not responsible for any injury, harm or related damages arising from any failure of the
customer, owner or user of the apparatus to facilitate those repairs.
FCC Statement
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Warranty
For a copy of the QSC Limited Warranty, visit the QSC website at www.qsc.com
Para una copia de la Garantía Limitada de QSC, visite el sitio web de QSC, en www.qsc.com
Pour obtenir une copie de la garantie limitée de QSC, visitez le site de QSC à www.qsc.com
Besuchen Sie die Webseite von QSC (www.qsc.com) um eine Kopie der beschräenkte Garantie von QSC zu erhalten.
如果您想要QSC有限保修的複印本，请造访QSC品的网站www.qsc.com
Для ознакомления с условиями ограниченной гарантии, посетите страницу компании QSC в интернете www.qsc.com
www.qsc.com ‫ للمنتجات الصوتية على‬QSC ‫ قم بزيارة الموقع اإللكتروني لشركة‬،QSC‫للحصول على نسخة من الضمان المحدود الخاص بـ‬
1001108-01-F
iii
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
FCC Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
TouchMix™ How To. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register and Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TouchMix-30 Pro Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TouchMix-8 / TouchMix-16 Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
1
1
1
Turn off Demo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Recall a Factory Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
What is a Scene? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Build a Mix Using Factory Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
What is a Channel Preset? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Auxiliary Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is an Auxiliary?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Name the Effects Channels (or Mixes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the FX Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Using the Input Channel FX Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Pitch Correct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Using Pitch Correct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Using the FX Channel Effect Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Using the FX Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Mute Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCA Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sub Groups (TouchMix-30 Pro only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Auxiliaries as Sub Groups (TouchMix-8 and 16 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matrix Mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Your Work as a Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
6
7
8
8
9
9
Using TouchMix with QSC Amplifiers and Loudspeakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Loudspeaker Gain and Preset Pop-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Select a QSC Loudspeaker Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
QSC GXD Amplifier Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Phantom Power (+48V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1001108-01-F
iv
Work on Your Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Simple and Advanced Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Auxiliary (Stage Monitor) Mixes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Input by Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Mix On Faders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Output Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PEQ Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
GEQ Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Anti-Feedback Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Limiter Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Auxes Tab (TouchMix-30 Pro only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Presets Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Setup Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Multi-Track Playback & Mix Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Mix Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
DAW Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Anti-Feedback System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Manually Ringing Out a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Using the Feedback Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Pre-Feedback Wizard Checklist: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
More about the Anti-Feedback System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Real Time Analyzer (RTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mutes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy & Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patch Matrix (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Room Tuning Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
19
20
21
22
TouchMix-30 Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
TouchMix-8 or TouchMix-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
User Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor (TouchMix-16 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solo In Place (SIP) (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1001108-01-F
v
24
24
25
26
26
26
TouchMix Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Top Panel and Remote-Device Controls (TouchMix-30 Pro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Rear Panel (TouchMix-30 Pro). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Right Side of the TouchMix-16
Mixing Surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Right Side of the TouchMix-8
Mixing Surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Rear Panel (TouchMix-16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rear Panel (TouchMix-8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
TouchMix-30 Pro Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
TouchMix™ Feature List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Nav Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Channel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Input Channel − Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Input Channel – Analog Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Input Channel − EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Input Channel − Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Input Channel − Gate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Input Channel − FX Sends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
FX Signal Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Input Channel − Aux Sends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Auxiliary Channels Flow Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Input Channel − Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Input Channel − Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Output Channel – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Channel − GEQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Channel − PEQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Channel − Compressor / Limiter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Channel − Anti-Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Channel − Auxes
(TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Channel − Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Channel − Setup / Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output – Speaker Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GXD Amp Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
59
On the GXD Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
On the TouchMix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Aux Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1001108-01-F
vi
Sub Groups (TouchMix-30 Pro only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Sub Group − Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Sub Group − PEQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Sub Group − Compressor / Limiter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Sub Groups − FX Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Sub Group − Auxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Sub Group − Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Sub Group − Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2‑Trk Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2‑Trk Playback − Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2-Trk PB – EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2-Trk Playback – Audio Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2-Trk Playback − Auxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2-Trk Playback − Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2-Trk Playback − Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2-Trk / Multitrack Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
FX Masters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
FX Master − Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
FX Masters − EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
FX Masters − Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
FX Master − Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
FX Master − Auxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
FX Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Wizards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
FX Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Gain Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Room Tuning Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
FX Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
FX Processor – Basic Chorus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
FX Processor – Dense Reverb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
FX Processor – Lush Reverb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
FX Processor – Mono and Stereo Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
FX Processor – Pitch Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
FX Processor – Pitch Correct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Remote Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Login Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Security Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1001108-01-F
vii
Miscellaneous Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Remote Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
User Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
User button defaults: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Mixer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Phantom Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Mute Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
About Mute Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Mute Groups Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Mute Group Edit Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Record / Playback (Multitrack USB Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Record / Playback – Main Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2‑Trk − Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2‑Trk Recording Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
DAW – Record / Playback (TouchMix-30 Pro only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Real-time Analyzer (RTA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Channel Safe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Auto Mixer TouchMix-30 Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Accessing the Auto-Mixer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Auto-Mixer Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
External Control Surfaces - TouchMix-30 Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Channel Strip View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Custom Fader Banks - TouchMix-30 Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Set up the Custom Fader Banks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
DCA Group Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
About DCA Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Talkback / Noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
TouchMix Wi-Fi Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Wi-Fi Router Access Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Setting it up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Connecting to a Facility’s Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Wireless Network Setup: Create New Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Wireless Network Setup: Connect to Existing Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Wired Network Setup: Static IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Wired Network Setup: Auto IP Address (DHCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
1001108-01-F
viii
TouchMix-30 Pro Phones and Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Phones Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Monitor Level and Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 Phones
and TouchMix-16 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Recording Setup – Multitrack USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Recall Session – Multitrack USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Aux Mix on Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
TouchMix-30 Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Control Descriptions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Patch Matrix (TouchMix-30 Pro only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Using the Patch Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Copy and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
TouchMix Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
TouchMix-30 Pro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
TouchMix-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
TouchMix-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
TouchMix Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mic/Line Input Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stereo Input Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stereo Auxiliary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mono Auxiliary Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stereo Sub Group (TouchMix-30 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mono Sub Group (TouchMix-30 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cue, Monitor, Talkback, Noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FX Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-Track Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RTA (Real Time Analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact QSC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
QSC, LLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Sales & Marketing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
QSC Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Application Engineering and Technical Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
QSC Self-Help Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
1001108-01-F
ix
TouchMix™ How To
IMPORTANT: This User Manual applies to mixers with TouchMix-30 Pro Firmware Version 3.0, or TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16
Firmware Version 3.0 installed. Earlier firmware releases do not support all of the functions described and some operations may differ.
Register and Update
STOP
We know you want to get right to using your TouchMix mixer, but before you do please stop and take a moment to visit www.qsc.com and register
your TouchMix. By registering you can…
• Download the latest firmware so that your mixer has all the latest features, refinements and performance enhancements.
• Sign up to be notified of future updates.
• Check to see if you are eligible for free extended warranty coverage.
While you’re there, you can also find videos and other tools to help you get the most from your TouchMix-30 Pro.
TouchMix-30 Pro Package Contents
1. TouchMix-30 Pro Mixer
2. Quick Start Guide TouchMix-30 Pro (TD-000509)
5. One of the following power cords
3. Warning Information Sheet (TD-000430)
7. Europe TouchMix-30 Pro, 2M, V-Lock
6. North America TouchMix-30 Pro, 2M, V-Lock
4. Limited Warranty (TD-000453-01 English)
TouchMix-8 / TouchMix-16 Package Contents
1. TouchMix-16 or TouchMix-8
2. Quick-Start Guide (TD-000445 or TD-000446)
5. USB Wi-Fi adaptor (installed in mixer’s USB port)
3. Warning Information Sheet
7. TouchMix carrying case
6. Power supply with IEC cable (AC connector type varies by region)
4. Limited Warranty (TD-000453-01 English)
About This Manual
This manual covers the features and operation of the TouchMix-8, TouchMix-16 (with firmware version 3.0) and TouchMix-30 Pro (with software
version 2.0). These mixers share many features and operational similarities but differ in other respects – most significantly, input and output
channel count. Features and functions that are unique to just one model are identified as such.
Getting Started
Since your TouchMix is a digital mixer there are lots of things you can do off-line to save time during setup and help you get acquainted with your
mixer. We highly recommend spending a little quality time with the mixer before taking it to a show for the first time.
Turn off Demo Mode
Demo mode is a looping slide show that plays as a factory default to give prospective buyers an overview of the mixer. You’ll probably want to turn
Demo Mode off – even though our graphics guys are really proud of how it looks.
To Disable Demo Mode:
1001108-01-F
Menu
Mixer Setup
Demo Mode Off
1
On
Recall a Factory Scene
What is a Scene?
Scenes allow storage and recall of mixer settings. A Scene includes all channel-processing settings, channel Names, Phantom Power settings,
Effects selections, DCA, Sub Group and Mute Group assignments. Scenes also include level settings. Factory scenes are stored with input faders at
minimum to prevent any surprises (feedback, music at 20 dB above the threshold of pain, etc.) when the scene is recalled. User scenes are stored
with levels set as they were when the scene was saved. User scenes may be stored to internal memory and to an external USB storage device.
There are circumstances when it’s useful to recall a scene but omit certain settings from being changed. The TouchMix-30 Pro offers these Recall
Options:
• Omit Levels: When switched on, the scene will be recalled without making any change to any level settings.
• Omit Outputs: When switched on, the scene will be recalled without making any change to any output EQ, comp/limiter or level settings. This is
especially useful when recalling a scene after the mixer’s outputs have been adjusted for a particular venue and speaker system.
• Omit Routing: When switched on, the scene will be recalled without making any change to routing such as Sub Group assignments and pre/
post selections.
Your TouchMix is loaded with pre-defined scenes for various kinds of performances. You can find the one that’s most like the show you’ll be mixing
and start there.
To Recall a Factory Scene:
Factory
Scene:
Recall
Defualt
Default
Horn Band
Rock Band
The factory scenes list includes a scene named Default. This scene will “zero” the mixer by returning all controls to their factory settings.
To Zero the mixer:
Factory
Scene:
Recall
Defualt
Default
Horn Band
Rock Band
If you'd like to navigate around the mix and see what the recalled settings are, return to the
screen.
Build a Mix Using Factory Presets
What is a Channel Preset?
A Channel Preset consists of settings for a single channel that are saved and can be recalled for use at a later time. A Channel Preset includes
settings for the channel EQ, Compressor and Gate. The channel name, phantom power setting and level settings are also stored with the preset but
may be omitted from a preset recall by setting the Recall Options switches at the bottom of the presets screen.
Your TouchMix includes over 120 channel presets that were programmed to work with common microphones in real, live sound applications by
skilled and experienced concert-sound mix-engineers. And they work. Those who have used TouchMix-30 Pro report great results using the presets
with little or no modification. You can also save your own channel presets to the mixer’s internal memory or to an external USB storage device.
To Select Channel Presets:
Inputs 1-8
Presets
In 1
1. Make sure that the Factory / User switch is in the Factory position.
2. In the left window you’ll see a list of instrument categories. Touch an instrument category name and a list of specific instruments appears in the
middle window.
3. Select a type of instrument and the right window will display a list of options for that instrument. There may be options with and without gates
and compressors as well as options for various types of microphones and pick-ups or different styles of music. Select the one that seems best
for your application.
To Learn About the Selected Preset:
To Recall the Preset:
1001108-01-F
Preset Name
Preset Name
Select any item
Recall
Select any item
2
Preset Info
Yes
You’ve just dialed in the settings for an input channel. You’ll also notice that the channel has been given a name that corresponds with the
instrument you selected. You can leave the name as is or rename the channel.
To Name a Channel:
Go to the Next Channel:
Setup
Mic
Joe’s Mic
Enter
Next
Repeat the process until you’ve set up all the channels you need.
Auxiliary Outputs
What is an Auxiliary?
In addition to the Main L/R (left/right) output mix, your TouchMix mixer is capable of controlling 4 (TouchMix-8), 8 (TouchMix-16) or 14
(TouchMix-30 Pro) additional output mixes.
These Auxiliary mixes are typically used to drive stage monitor speaker systems or in-ear monitors (IEM) for performers. They may also be used
for a recording mix, audio feed to video or a send to an overflow area. In any case, it makes sense to label the auxiliary outputs to help keep them
straight during use. Type in a name for the output – it could be the name of the performer who gets that mix or it could be something like “Singers”
or “Horns” or “Video” or “Patio”.
Aux Masters
To name an auxiliary output:
Setup
Aux 1
Aux
Joe’s Monitor
The name will be displayed on the aux mix selector buttons on the left side of the screen.
Auxes may also be linked so that two mono mixes become one stereo mix.
To Link two Auxes:
Aux Masters
Link
Setup
Aux 1
Link
TouchMix-30 Pro – A pair of TRS headphone outputs labelled Aux 11/12 and Aux 13/14 may be found on the mixer’s rear panel. These outputs
receive their signal from the corresponding Auxiliary Mixes and are intended to drive wired, In Ear Monitors (IEM). If using these outputs, it’s
recommended that the Auxiliary mixes driving these headphone outputs be linked for stereo operation.
TouchMix-8 – A single TRS headphone output labelled Aux 3/4 may be found on the mixer’s rear panel.
TouchMix-16 – A pair of TRS headphone outputs labelled Aux 7/8 and Aux 9/10 may be found on the mixer’s top panel. These unbalanced, stereo
outputs may also be configured as balanced, mono, line-level outputs (see the Aux output channel Setup tab).
Effects
Audio effects (FX) such as reverb, delay, chorus, pitch shift (pitch change) and pitch correct are essential in today’s audio production.
The TouchMix-30 Pro has six multi-effects processors or “engines” while the TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 have four. All of these processors may
be configured to be one of six different effects including Lush Reverb, Dense Reverb, Chorus, Mono Delay, Stereo Delay and Pitch Shift.
Each of these effects have multiple presets. The reverb processors, for example have presets simulating various sizes of rooms and halls as well as
reverb plates. In addition, there are brighter and darker sounding variations.
Along with the above effects, there is a Pitch Correct effect that can be assigned (inserted) to any one of the input channels.
Name the Effects Channels (or Mixes)
In the middle of a show it’s easy to forget which effect was intended for what performers or instruments so this would be a great time to name the
Effects Send channels. For example, you might name an FX channel “Voc Delay” or “Drum Rev”.
FX Masters 1-8
To Name FX channels:
1001108-01-F
FX 1
3
Setup
FX
New Verb
Using the FX Wizard
Less experienced users will find that the FX Wizard simplifies what can be a confusing process while skilled operators will find it to be incredibly
fast. With the FX Wizard you can quickly…
• Select an effect that’s right for the instruments or voices you want to enhance.
• Bring the instruments or voices into the effect.
• Adjust the overall amount of the effect that will be heard.
• Send the effect to monitors as you desire.
Select and Assign Effects (FX) Using the Wizard:
FX Wizard
Wizard
FX 3
Select an effect preset. Only effects that work for the Source and Type of input you have selected will be shown. So any effect you select using the
wizard will be a valid one although it may or may not work in the context of your mix
Select an Effect Preset:
1. Use the Master Encoder or touch-and-drag to scroll up and down the list to see all the selections. Select one item from each list.
2. Touch Recall. The Preset is now loaded, and the name is displayed below the Type window.
3. With the Preset loaded, it’s time to decide which input channels should go to the FX1 processor.
Send inputs to the FX processor:
4. Buttons with the names of inputs are displayed on the Wizard Screen. Touch any button to send an input to the effect. Use the FX Master fader
to adjust the amount of effect heard in the main mix.
Send the effect to monitors:
5. Is the performer going to want to hear the effect in the stage monitors or in-ear monitors? If so, it’s easy to send it there. Just use the "Select
Aux Outputs (monitors) to receive:" buttons to route the effect to a monitor.
6. There are more effects available so touch one of the tabs at the top of the screen to set up more effects.
Using the Input Channel FX Tab
The FX tab on the Input Channels provides another way to select and control effects.
To access FX from an Input Channel:
FX
In 1
Once in the Channel FX screen, you can…
• Go to the Effects Processor’s control panel by touching a control panel icon. Press Home to come back.
• Use the sliders to control the amount of signal sent from the channel to each of the Effects Processors,
• Adjust the two most important parameters for each Effect using the “Global FX Parameters” controls. Note that any adjustment made to these
controls is global and will change the Effect everywhere it is used.
Pitch Correct
To assign Pitch Correct to a channel:
Inputs 1-8
In 1
FX
Pitch Correct
Enable
The Pitch Correct Effect is somewhat different than the Reverb, Delay, Chorus and Pitch Shift Effects. Pitch Correct can only be used on one input
channel at a time and there is one Pitch Correct effect. When it is assigned to a channel, it will be unassigned from any channel to which it was
previously assigned.
Touch the Enable button to assign Pitch Correct to the currently selected channel.
1001108-01-F
4
Using Pitch Correct
Use the Blend control to vary the mix between corrected (wet) and uncorrected (dry) signal. 100% wet is used to correct pitch. A blend between wet
and dry is used to provide a doubling effect.
Use the Key control to select a musical key. This helps Pitch Correct be more accurate in determining what the intended note is.
Use the Correct Rate control to adjust how quickly the pitch correction tracks.
Using the FX Channel Effect Tab
Go to the FX Channel Effect Tab (From the Input Channel FX tab):
FX Masters 1-8
To Access the FX Control Panel:
FX 1
Effect
Touch the Effect window to select the type of effect.
• Chorus
• Stereo Delay
• Pitch Shift
• Dense Reverb
• Lush Reverb
• Mono Delay
Once an Effect is selected touch the Preset Tab. From this screen select a preset setting for the effect. Note that the setting can include EQ. Factory
presets are displayed in the left-hand window. User presets may be stored and recalled using the center and right-hand windows.
FX Masters 1-8
To select an Effects preset:
Recall
FX 1
Presets
Yes
Effect
Factory
Pitch-Light Detune
Pitch-Medium Detune
Touch the Effect Tab to return to the Effect Processor control panel. Each type of Effect Processor displays a different control panel with parameters
appropriate for the Effect.
Use the FX Master fader to the right of the FX panel to adjust the amount of effect heard in the main speaker system.
To adjust the level of the Effect sent to the Main L/R Output:
Below the Effect control panel is the FX Returns to Monitors section. Use the sliders to set how much of the effect is sent to each auxiliary / monitor
mix. If two auxiliaries have been linked, a slider and a pan control will be displayed. Above each slider is a channel label and a Mute [M] indicator.
Using the FX Overview
If you would prefer to see the send and return levels for all your effects at once, the FX overview is the place to go.
To use the FX Overview:
Menu
FX Overview
1. Input channels are arranged in columns. Use the Nav Strip to select a group of Input channels. Each Input channel sends for FX Sends 1–4
(TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16) and 1 – 6 (TouchMix-30 Pro).
2. Individual FX Mixes are arranged in horizontal rows.
3. FX Master fader – The FX Master fader controls the overall output level of the FX Mix to the Main L/R outputs. Note that the FX Master does not
affect the level of the Effect sent to the Aux channels.
4. Effect Processor – Indicates the type of Effect currently being applied to the FX Mix.
So that’s about it for effects. We worked hard on the TouchMix effects and know that they sound superb and will enhance your performances. You
can dive in deep or just use the wizards, factory defaults and presets. Either way, you now have the tools for a great sounding show.
1001108-01-F
5
Mute Groups
There are many times when it is useful to mute some of the inputs and outputs. For example, you might want to mute everything but a stereo input
for break music. Or there may be a part of your show when the band leaves the stage while one member does a solo number. Mute groups let you
mute multiple inputs and outputs from a single button. For more information on mutes, see "Mutes" on page 19
To set up Mute Groups:
Mute
Groups
To name the Mute Group:
Edit
Mute Group Name
Mute 1
In 1
Select channels to be assigned
Mute
Joe
New Verb
Select another Mute group to set up or touch Close Edit Close Edit to finish.
To use Mute Groups:
Mute
Groups
Mute
Mute
NOTE: Mute Groups can be assigned to the User Buttons. "User Buttons" on page 24.
NOTE: When a channel is muted by a Mute Group, the channel Mute button on the Home screen looks like:
Mute
DCA Groups
A DCA groups faders together so the overall level of all the channels in the group can be controlled by a single DCA fader.
A DCA fader does not change the position of any of the faders in the group.
IMPORTANT: Here is an important thing to know – if the DCA master fader is at 0.0 (the unity (U) mark), it does nothing to the
level of an assigned channel. The DCA adds or subtracts level. Move the DCA Fader up 3 dB and everything it’s assigned to will
increase by 3 dB. Move it down 3 dB and – well you probably figured that out. Remember that assigning or unassigning a channel
to a DCA Group can cause a sudden change in the level of the channel so it’s good practice to have the DCA master at 0.0 when
changing assignments.
DCA Groups
To Setup a DCA Group:
wish.
DCA 1
In 1
In 3 Continue selecting channels as you
You can assign inputs, outputs and FX Master faders to a DCA. If you assign an input, and the output to which it's going to the same DCA, changes
you make using the DCA are doubled for the input. Raise the DCA 3 dB, the input is effectively raised 6 dB.
To Name the DCA group:
To Mute a DCA Group:
FXName
DCA
Drums
DCA Groups
Mute
Mute
When you mute a DCA, all channels assigned to that DCA are muted. If a channel is muted by the channel Mute button, or a Mute Group, the DCA
does not un-mute the channel when the DCA is un-muted.
1001108-01-F
6
Sub Groups (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Like DCA Groups, Sub Groups are used to control the volume of multiple channels at once. However, DCA Groups simply add or subtract gain for
the channels they control. No signal is routed through a DCA. Unlike DCA Groups, signal is routed through Sub Groups. This means that Sub Groups
can apply processing including EQ, Limiting and even Effects to multiple channels. There are basically three ways that Sub Groups are used…
• To apply common processing and level control to multiple inputs and return the processed group to the Main L/R mix.
• To route a group of inputs to an external destination such as a broadcast mix. These output groups are commonly referred to as “stems”.
• To route a blend of Sub Groups to an external destination.
All eight Sub Groups appear on the Auxiliary mixes.
To output Sub Groups:
Joe’s Vocal
Sub Groups
Aux 1
There are two ways to assign Input Channels to Sub Groups.
From an Input Channel
To assign a channel to Sub Groups:
Inputs 1-8
In 1
Setup
Sub 3
If the Sub Group is going to be sent to the Main L/R output, the channel should usually be unassigned from Main L/R. Otherwise the channel’s
signal will be sent directly to the Main L/R output (without any processing) and also sent to the Main L/R by way of the Sub Group. There are some
advanced use cases where such a double assignment may be desirable but typically that is not the case.
From a Sub Group
To assign channels to a Sub Group:
Sub Groups
Sub 1
Setup
In 1
This will take you to the Sub Group Setup page.
The lower portion of the page displays the numbers and friendly names of the input channels. Touch the button of the channels you wish to assign
to the Sub Group. If the channel is assigned to the Main L/R mix, an [L/R] icon will appear by the button,
NOTE: "Remove Input Channel from L/R when assigning to Sub Group?"
In the “Yes” position, assigning an input channel to a Sub Group will cause the input to be unassigned from the Main L/R.
In the “No” position, assigning a channel to a sub group will have no effect on the channel’s Main L/R assignment.
1001108-01-F
7
Using Auxiliaries as Sub Groups (TouchMix-8 and 16 only)
The Auxiliary mixes may be assigned to the Main L/R output allowing the auxiliaries to function as sub groups. This feature is intended for use with
the input channel “Assign To Main L/R” function.
To use an Auxiliary channel as a Sub Group (for this example, we are assigning In Channel 1 to Aux 5 Sub Group):
1.
Aux Masters
2.
Inputs 1-8
Aux 5
In 1
Main L/R
Setup
Adjust Aux
send 5 to 0*
Auxes
Post Fader
Setup
Main L/R
*Adjusting the Aux Send 5 to 0 adds the Input Channel 1 to the Sub Group.
3. Repeat Step 2 for all the input channels that are part of the Sub Group.
4. The channel faders Aux Master (Aux 5) now functions as a Sub Group Master.
Matrix Mixing
To understand a matrix, it’s first useful
to understand the concept of a sub-mix
(sometimes called a “stem”). As the name
implies, a sub-mix is a mix consisting of some
subset of all the mixer’s inputs. For example
there could be sub-mixes consisting of all
the violins, or the choir, or drums, or delegate
microphones or sound effects. If you’ve got all
of these at once you’ve got a really interesting
production but we digress. A matrix simply lets
you blend these sub-mixes (stems) into a single
mix.
A stem can be created by assigning inputs to a
Sub-Group or by sending them to an Auxiliary.
Now that we’ve got the stems, what do we do
with them? On the TouchMix-30 Pro, Auxiliaries
9 – 14 also function as mix matrices. In addition
to all the input channels, these signals may be
sent to Auxiliaries 9 – 14…
In 1 – Kick
In 2 – Snare
In 3 – Overhead
In 4 – Overhead
Sub Group 1 – Drums
Sub 1 Fader
In 5 – Lead Guitar
In 6 – Rhythm Guitar
Sub Group 2 – Guitars
Sub 1 Fader
In 7 – Piano
In 6 – Organ
Sub Group 3 – Keyboards
Sub 1 Fader
In 9 – Lead Vocal
In 10 – Backing 1
In 11 – Backing 2
Sub Group 4 – Vocals
Sub 1 Fader
Main Out
Sub Groups’ Aux 1 Sends
Aux Out
• Main L/R
• Auxiliaries 1 – 8
• Sub-Groups 1 – 8
All of these stems can be mixed as needed and routed out via Auxiliaries 9 – 14. The application may be as simple as just sending a mono mix of
the Main L/R to an overflow area or as complex as creating a separate broadcast mix from 8 or more stems. In addition, all the inputs are available
on Auxiliaries 9 – 14 so it’s possible to mix in the signal from one or more input channels.
1001108-01-F
8
Save Your Work as a Scene
You’ve put some effort into setting up your mix so now would be a great time to save it. A Scene is a snapshot of all the settings on the mixer.
TIP: It's a good idea to save your scene with the outputs muted or levels down. Why? Because it's possible that the gain settings
on power amplifiers or powered loudspeakers have changed since the scene was saved. Recalling the scene could result in a blast of
feedback from all the speakers connected to the mixer.
To Save Your Scene:
Scenes
Menu
Save Scene
To Name Your Scene: As:
Save/Save As
Saturday Night
Storage Location
To Save Your Scene:
Mixer
Save
USB
Sound Check
Before connecting anything, plug in your TouchMix and make sure that all the inputs and Auxiliary Outputs are muted. This will prevent uncontrolled
feedback if a microphone is patched into a hot channel.
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 9-16
Inputs 17-24
Aux Masters
Stereo In/2-Trk
Aux Out 9-14
To Mute Channels:
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
In each of the groups of faders, press the Mute button for each channel. Now you can connect the mixer to sources and speaker systems.
Using TouchMix with QSC Amplifiers and Loudspeakers
If you’re using QSC E, K, K.2, KW or KLA loudspeakers or GXD amplifiers your TouchMix can recommended input level
settings to help optimize your system gain structure as well as offering output presets for different applications.
For Main L/R:
For Aux outputs:
Main
Aux Masters
Setup
Select an amplifier or loudspeaker series.
Aux 1
Setup
Select an amplifier or loudspeaker series.
Loudspeaker Gain and Preset Pop-up
In addition to displaying the recommended input gain setting (1) for the selected
loudspeaker (2), the pop-up displays a choice of presets (3) for the loudspeaker. For
most QSC loudspeaker there are options that optimize the loudspeaker for live sound
reinforcement, stage monitor use or dance music playback.
Select QSC Speaker Model and Preset Name to display Gain Settings or Recall a Preset
2
Model
3
Preset Name
K8.2
Dance
K10.2
Floor Monitor
K12.2
K10.2
0dB
Live Bright
Live
In the pop-up all you need to do is:
Studio
1
Vocal Monitor
1. Touch the button associated with your loudspeaker, or amplifier
2. Adjust your equipment as instructed
OFF
+10dB
GAIN
3. Select the preset you want to use with your loudspeakers
Done
4. Touch Recall Preset.
1001108-01-F
9
Recall Preset
Rotate Gain knob 5 detents (clicks) past zero.
These settings give you the optimum signal to noise performance and get the most from your QSC loudspeakers or amplifier. The mixer’s output
meters will reflect when you’re “running out of speaker”. Note that you will see the “Limit” light on your speakers illuminate as the mixer drives
them harder during louder portions. This is normal and is just the speaker’s internal DSP doing its job.
Select a QSC Loudspeaker Preset
The GXD amplifier and K.2 Series loudspeakers both have presets for various applications. The TouchMix mixers have the same presets . Make sure
you use only one or the other. Do not use the TouchMix presets if you have presets set up in the GXD or the K.2 loudspeakers, and vice versa.
E-Series – QSC's GXD series amplifiers include voices for QSC E-Series loudspeakers. If you are using any other amplifier, E-Series voices may be
applied by the TouchMix. Be certain that any equalization in the amplifiers you are using is bypassed or set to flat.
K.2 Series – The K.2 presets may also be recalled from the channel Preset screen. These settings are identical to those available from the Gain
and Preset Pop-up. These are identical to the factory presets in the K.2 loudspeakers. Simply set your K.2 speakers to the factory default setting
and leave it there. The mixer will now supply the preset.
To recall a Loudspeaker Preset:
For Main L/R:
For Aux outputs:
Main
Aux Masters
Select Series > Select Model > Select Preset > Recall.
Presets
Select Series > Select Model > Select Preset > Recall.
Presets
Aux 1
QSC GXD Amplifier Settings
If you are using a QSC GXD amplifier, you can optimize the gain and sensitivity for use with your TouchMix. See "GXD Amp Settings" on page 59
Phantom Power (+48V)
Most condenser microphones and some direct boxes require phantom power from the mixer. On TouchMix mixers, phantom power may be turned
on or off on a per channel basis. Make sure that phantom power is on for those channels that need it and off for those that don’t. It's a good
practice to keep Phantom Power turned off when making connections in order to avoid the inevitible loud pops that will occur.
21
To Enable or Disable Phantom Power (+48V):
20
+48 V
Mic
48V
In 21
To Exit
In 20
Phantom power is also accessible from the channel Setup screens.
Work on Your Inputs
Ask the performers in turn to do what they do to make their audio contribution to the performance. Without
un-muting their channels, bring the channel’s input gain Trim up while watching the channel meter on the
Home screen. What you are looking for is a meter that is bouncing around the 0 mark when the performer is
producing a normal output level.
0
TIP: During sound check performers will usually not play as loudly as they do in an actual
performance so keep this in mind and allow a little extra headroom.
With the performer performing, un-mute the channel and bring the fader up until the desired performance level
is reached.
If you are using one of the internal channel presets, this channel should already be sounding good. If it’s not
what you’re looking for, try some of the other preset choices. For most instruments and musical styles, there will
be a preset that works well. If not, you'll need to dive into the channel and dial it in manually.
To Adjust Channel Parameters:
Inputs 1-8
In 1
At the top of the screen, select the tab for the channel processing element you want to work on.
1001108-01-F
10
Not
Acceptable
Acceptable
0
0
0
Simple and Advanced Mode
TouchMix mixers offer two modes of operation:
• Simple Mode – Presents the user with a reduced set of controls. It’s important to know that switching into Simple mode does not alter the
values of any Advanced-mode controls.
• Advanced Mode – Presents all mixer controls to the user.
You can select Simple and Advanced modes individually for an EQ, Gate, Compressor or Effect. Note that the Stereo and Mono Delays do not have a
Simple mode. Look for the Simple button on the screen. Or you can make the selection globally.
To Globally Select Simple / Advanced Mode:
OR
Simple
Menu
Advanced
Auxiliary (Stage Monitor) Mixes
There are two general approaches to setting up stage monitor mixes:
Input by Input
With all the performers on stage, ask each performer in turn to play or sing just one thing (Kick, Snare, Guitar, Sax, etc). Ask each performer how
much of that instrument they want in their monitor. Our guess is that they will all say “that’s plenty” during sound check and then ask for lots more
after the first song – just sayin’.
Inputs 1-8
To Set Up Monitor Mixes One Input at a Time:
In 1
Auxes
You will see sliders representing the send levels of the input to all the aux mixes. If any auxes are linked for stereo, the linked pair will have a Level
control and a Pan control.
Adjust
-40
-20
-10
U
10
for each performer in turn then use the
Prev
Next
buttons to move through the channels.
Mix On Faders
Sometimes it’s preferable to set up a complete mix for one auxiliary output at a time. On the left side of the mixer’s screen you will find buttons
that directly access the Auxiliary mixes. Touch one of the Auxiliary Select buttons to go to the mix you want to work on. Use the faders to adjust the
sends to the selected Aux Mix. Use the Nav Strip to move between fader banks.
Note that you can Mute an individual channel in an Auxiliary mix without muting it anywhere else.
TIP: There are times when several mixes will be similar to each other. To speed set-up, refer to "Copy & Paste" on page 20.
Output Processing
Like the input channels, the outputs (Main L/R and Aux Outputs) have their own processing.
To access Main Output Processing:
To access Auxiliary Output Processing:
Main
Aux Masters
Each output includes a full complement of processing and other functions including:
1001108-01-F
11
Aux Out 9-14
Aux 1
Overview Tab
Overview
Displays an overview of the output channel settings including Delay, DCA and Mute Group Assigns, Pre/Post pick-off points (auxiliaries only), Aux
Send Levels (see Matrix Mixing).
PEQ Tab
PEQ
Six-band parametric EQ with High / Low-Cut filters and a Real Time Analyzer (RTA)
This tab displays the six-band, parametric equalizer plus the Low and High-Cut Filters. The 6 bands of parametric EQ can be individually bypassed
using the numbered buttons. Bands 1 and 6 may be switched from parametric to shelving operation. You can use the two-finger pinch / zoom
gesture to adjust the Q for the selected Band.
Touch the
RTA On
button to activate / deactivate a Real Time Analyzer display for the channel. ("Real-time Analyzer
(RTA)" on page 102).
NOTE: When the RTA is not enabled, the Parametric EQ screen is enlarged to occupy both the RTA and PEQ screen area.
Low-Cut / High-Cut filters – These filters are used to roll off high or low frequency content. There are a number of possible applications.
• For stage monitors, it is common to roll off low frequencies at 80 – 100 Hz. There is usually ample low frequency energy on stage without any
help from the monitors. Keeping it out of the monitors can reduce “rumble” on stage and in the house.
• For speech only systems, rolling off low frequencies can reduce microphone handling noise or, if outdoors wind noise.
• Fill speakers may not need any additional low-frequency energy as there is ample bottom end coming from subwoofers.
• There is a technique known as “subs on auxes” in which the subwoofer is fed from one of the auxes while the main speakers are fed from the
mixer’s main outputs. Only those instruments that contain low-frequencies are sent to the subwoofer. This provides more control over the lows
and can help keep the bottom end tighter. If this is being done, the Low and High-Cut filters could be used to set the crossover point between
subs and main speakers.
GEQ Tab
GEQ
One-third octave graphic equalizer with an RTA
In addition to the Real Time Analyzer (RTA), this tab displays two, overlaid 1/3 octave graphic equalizers.
• GEQ: The solid faders [Insert Image] control the user adjustable graphic equalizer. The “GEQ” switch may be used to bypass (Out) or activate
(In) this equalizer. The “Reset” button will return the GEQ sliders to 0.
• Tuning Wizard EQ: If the “Tuning” switch is set to “In” a set of ‘ghost’ faders
(1) is displayed to indicate the settings resulting from adjustment by the Room
Tuning Wizard (See "Room Tuning Wizard" on page 22). The ‘ghost’ faders are
indicators only and are not adjustable.
The GEQ and the Tuning Wizard EQ are additive. So 3 dB boost from the Tuning
Wizard and a 2 dB boost from the GEQ at the same frequency will result in a 5 dB
total boost.
Touch the RTA On button to activate / deactivate a Real Time Analyzer
display for the channel. "Real Time Analyzer (RTA)" on page 18
1001108-01-F
12
1
Touch the
Tuning Wizard
button to go to the Room Tuning Wizard screen.
Anti-Feedback Tab
AntiFeedback
Anti-Feedback Wizard and Manual operation
The Anti-Feedback system automatically identifies and displays suspected feedback frequencies. When a suspected feedback frequency is
identified, a single touch applies a filter at that frequency. In addition a Feedback Wizard can assist in finding and cutting feedback-prone
frequencies.
Limiter Tab
Limiter
Displays the limiter and its controls. We strongly encourage the use of the limiter for In Ear Monitors.
Auxes Tab (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Auxes
The Main L/R outputs may be returned to Auxiliary mixes 1 – 14. Auxiliary mixes 9 -14 may be returned to Auxiliary mixes 1 – 8. Refer to "Patch
Matrix (TouchMix-30 Pro only)" on page 21 for more information.
Presets Tab
Presets
Preset save/recall
This tab offers a Factory Preset named Reset that returns all output control parameters to their factory values. In addition, any settings you make
can be stored to and recalled from either internal or external (USB) memory.
The Preset Tab also includes factory voicings for QSC E-Series and K.2 Series loudspeakers. These settings are also available for QSC PLD and GXD
amplifiers. The E-Series voicings are intended for use with other amplifiers that lack DSP. An “X” suffix after the preset name indicates the preset
is intended for use with a sub-woofer. Do not use the mixer presets and the PLD or GXD voicings together – your E-Series speakers will not sound
twice as good.
Setup Tab
Setup
The Setup Tab includes the following utility functions for the output.
Rename
Linking
Aux
Link
Joe’s Monitor
Touch the field to enter a name for the output (not available on Main output).
This Links odd-to-even pairs of auxiliary mixes to create a stereo mix.
Delay
Delay
Delay is most commonly used for remote fill speakers. The objective is to set the delay so that
the sound from the primary system arrives at the listeners ears just slightly (20 – 30 msec)
ahead of the sound from the fill system. When done correctly, the listeners perceive the sound
as coming from the primary system even though most of what they hear is from the fill speakers.
In venues with very deep stages, the engineer will sometimes delay the house system so that
it time aligns with the back-line. In other words, set up the system so that the sound from the
1001108-01-F
Units
13
In
55.0
feet
48.9
ms
16.8
meters
actual kick drum and the reinforced kick drum arrive at the listeners’ ears at the same time. The delay provides a read out in msecs. (up to 100),
meters (up to 34.3) and feet (up to 113).
Channel Safe During Scene Recall
When a Scene is recalled, it sets all the controls to the settings saved with the Scene. There
may be times you do not want to change a specific output channel, or channels. The default
position, Recallable, allows the scene to recall the saved settings. The Safe position does not
allow the scene to change any settings of this channel.
QSC Amplifier and Speaker Settings:
Amplifiers
E Series
K Series
K.2 Series
Channel Safe
Channel Safe
During Scene Recall
During Scene Recall
Recallable
Safe
KLA Series
KW Series
Refer to "Using TouchMix with QSC Amplifiers and Loudspeakers" on page 9 and "QSC GXD Amplifier Settings" on page 10. Also see "What
is a Channel Preset?" on page 2 for information on preset voices for QSC E-Series loudspeakers.
Aux Pick-off
Pre Fader
Post Fader
Pre Dynamics
Pre All
Available for the Aux mixes only, these buttons determine whether the point from which the signal is taken is before or after the channel fader. For
most monitor mixing applications, this should be set to Pre Fader.
Assignments
DCA 1
Mute 1
These buttons assign the output to a Mute Group or a DCA Group. Refer to "Mute Groups" on page 6 and "DCA Groups" on page 6 for details.
Recording
TouchMix mixers make it easier than ever to capture a live performance in a stereo or a multi-track recording. All you need is a USB hard-drive.
NOTE: Hard-drive requirements – A list of hard-drives that QSC has qualified may be found at qsc.com. There are far too many
hard-drives available for us to test them all so there are certainly many unlisted drives that will work well with TouchMix. Higher speed
drives (>7200 RPM) tend to work best. Some higher speed drives don’t do their best when powered from the USB port but will work
when used with an external power supply. We have also had very good luck with solid state drives. USB thumb-drives may work for
recording a small number of channels but are not recommended although users report good results with better quality, USB 3.0
thumb drives.
Formatting the drive
The drive must be formatted as FAT 32 and de-fragmentation improves seek time.
If formatting the drive from an Apple Mac computer select MS-DOS (FAT) as the Format and MBR (Master Boot Record) as the scheme.
The TouchMix mixer can also format a drive. The format function is available from the Recording Setup screen.
Drive space for recording
Be sure that there is sufficient space on the drive for your recording. To calculate the space required for your recording…
• For 48 kHz – Space required (in MB) = 11.5 x minutes x tracks
• For 44.1 kHz – Space required (in MB) = 10.6 x minutes x tracks
It is good practice to have more disk space available than you need. If the drive is nearly full, TouchMix has to look for nooks and crannies of
available space. This will result in fragmented wave files and potential loss of audio data and synchronization across tracks. At approximately 3
hours of non-stop recording, the maximum file size supported by FAT32 is exceeded. To avoid problems, stop and then resume recording. It is not
necessary to create a new session. The TouchMix displays a pop-up that warns you when this limit is approaching. If you do exceed the FAT32 limit,
track synchronization may be lost.
NOTE: Depending on the number of tracks recorded and the performance of the hard drive, multi-track playback may slow down the
rendering of objects on the mixer screen resulting in lagging display of control movement.
1001108-01-F
14
Transferring tracks between TouchMix and DAW
A utility application – TouchMix DAW Utility - that facilitates transferring tracks between TouchMix mixers and Digital Audio Workstations is available
for download at www.qsc.com. The application runs on Mac or Windows computers.
Sample Rate
In general, use 44.1 kHz for CD projects, and 48 kHz for video projects. Do not change sample rate while recording.
To View or Change Sample Rate:
Sample Rate 44.1 kHz
Mixer Setup
Menu
48 kHz
Multi-Track Recording
All TouchMix models are capable of recording all audio inputs plus a stereo mix directly to a USB hard-drive (see above). The audio is captures as a
32-bit, floating point wave file.
Recording and Playback Capacity
• TouchMix-30 Pro: 32 tracks (30 inputs + stereo mix)
• TouchMix-16: 22 tracks (20 inputs + stereo mix)
• TouchMix-8: 14 tracks (12 inputs + stereo mix)
Connect a hard-drive (see above) to one of the USB inputs of the mixer.
Set the External Recording & Playback Mode to Multitrack:
To create a recording session:
To select channels to record:
Touch
Arm
Rec/
Play
Rec/
Play
Recording
Setup
Rec/
Play
New Session
Inputs 1-8
Stereo MP3
Recording
Mode
USB Drive Playback
Enter a
name
Inputs 9-16
And/Or
Multitrack
USB Drive
DAW
Create
Inputs 17-24
And/Or
Multitrack
Stereo In/2-Trk
And/Or
for each channel you want to record.
Once all the channels you wish to record have been armed, touch (Record Button) to begin recording. Touch the (Stop) button to end recording.
NOTE: User buttons may be assigned to Arm / Disarm and select Track or Input as the source for all channels at once. "User
Buttons" on page 24
IMPORTANT: Do not unplug your TouchMix until you have stopped recording! If you do, your recorded tracks will not be usable. You
must end the Session by touching the STOP button on the transport control. Doing so writes a header file that is needed in order to
play back the recording or import it into a DAW.
The TouchMix mixers permit over-dubs, however only the last recorded track will play back on the mixer. Earlier passes are left on the drive and
may be imported into a DAW.
1001108-01-F
15
Multi-Track Playback & Mix Down
Tracks recorded on the TouchMix mixers may be played back and mixed down on the mixer.
To load a recorded Session:
USB Session
Recording
Setup
Rec/
Play
Recall
Vocal 1 - Joe
Backup Voc 1
Guitar Acoustic 1
A list of available recordings is displayed. Select the recording you want to play and touch Recall. Now that the session is loaded, the next step is to
switch the input channel source to “Track”.
Touch
Track
Inputs 1-8
Rec/
Play
To select Track as the input source:
Inputs 9-16
Inputs 17-24
And/Or
And/Or
Stereo In/2-Trk
And/Or
for each channel you want to play back.
Use the Locator bar at the bottom of the Rec / Play screen to set the starting point for recording.
Mix Down
There are three ways to mix down your multi-track recording.
• Import the multi-track waves into a DAW (digital audio workstation). See “Transferring Tracks between TouchMix and DAW” above.
• Record the mixer’s analog output to an external 2-track recorder. Simply connect the TouchMix Main L/R outputs to the inputs of your 2-track
device.
• Record a stereo mix to DAW via the USB DAW connection (TouchMix-30 Pro only).
• Internal mix down to 2-track.
To mix down to 2-track:
1. Recall the session and set up the mixer for Playback as described above.
Stereo In/2-Trk
2.
2-Trk Rec
From the Record/Play Screen:
If you would like to use the Main L/R channel processing on the stereo mix, select
Return to the Rec / Play screen and touch
Post
Main L/R
, if not, select
to begin mix down. When you are finished, touch
Pre
. Touch
Arm
.
on the transport controls.
What to do with the 2-track mix down?
• Export to a DAW for further processing and to be edited into individual songs. The wave files may be found in the last two folders of the directory
containing the session.
• TouchMix-30 Pro only – Create an MP3 version from the mixer. The TouchMix-30 Pro has the capability of rendering the 2-track mix as an MP3 file.
To make an MP3 version of Tracks 31/32:
Stereo In/2-Trk
2-Trk Rec
Export 2-track
The MP3 audio file will be saved to the "\<session name>.tmRecord\exports" directory.
DAW Interface
The TouchMix-30 Pro is capable of interfacing to Mac OSX computers with Core Audio. Core Audio was introduced with OSX version 10.3. The
mixer must be connected to the computer using a USB type-B connector attached to the “USB DAW” port of the mixer. To verify that your Mac is
connected, open the Audio MIDI Setup utility on the computer (Finder > Applications > Utilities > Audio MIDI Setup). “QSC TM30 Pro” will appear in
the Audio Devices window. Select the mixer and make sure that the sample rate on the Mac matches that of the Mixer.
To View or Change Sample Rate:
1001108-01-F
Menu
Mixer Setup
Sample Rate 44.1 kHz
16
48 kHz
Your DAW software will also likely require some configuration to connect with the TouchMix-30 Pro. See your DAW software documentation for
information on this topic. There is also a guide to configuration of some common DAW software at www.qsc.com.
NOTE: User buttons may be assigned to Arm / Disarm and select Track or Input as the source for all channels at once. "User
Buttons" on page 24
Anti-Feedback System
The TouchMix-30 Pro includes twelve narrow-band, anti-feedback filters on each output (eight filters for TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16). These
filters are extremely useful for eliminating feedback frequencies while having very little effect on overall tonal balance. The filters may be adjusted
manually or automatically using the “Feedback Wizard” (see below).
Manually Ringing Out a System
In order to identify feedback frequencies, it’s necessary to deliberately make the system feedback. This process is known is “ringing out” or
“squeaking” the system. Here’s how an experienced sound system operator would go about it.
• Bring all mixer output faders to minimum
• Place all microphones and speakers in position
• Bring the input level of power amplifiers or powered speakers to the level that will be used in performance.
• Bring the input gain and channel faders for the mix you’re working on to the approximate level they will be at during the performance.
• Warn anybody who is around that you are going to make some unpleasant noises.
• Slowly and carefully bring up the fader for the output you are working on until the system begins to feedback.
• Be prepared to quickly back down the fader if the feedback really starts “taking off”.
• It may be necessary to have someone talk or shout into a microphone to “excite” the system into feedback.
• Adjust the frequency of a filter to match the feedback frequency and reduce the gain until the feedback goes away.
• Repeat until you have achieved sufficient system gain without feedback.
Using the Feedback Wizard
The tricky part is to identify the feedback frequencies. Fortunately, you don’t need to identify them because your TouchMix has built-in tools to do
that for you. Here’s how to use those tools.
To access the Anti-Feedback System:
Aux Masters
Aux 1
AntiFeedback
Feedback Wizard
OR
AnitFeedback
Pre-Feedback Wizard Checklist:
• Microphones and loudspeakers in their performance positions.
• Input channel gain and level settings approximately at performance levels.
• Zero the filter bands or touch Reset. The Wizard won't use a filter unless its gain is set to 0.0 dB Cut.
• Output you're working with set at a level that's slightly below its threshold of feedback.
• If the space is very quiet, turn on some noise using the control in the Feedback Wizard.
• The Wizard will cause feedback to occur briefly at levels that may be uncomfortable to those who are sensitive to such things. Let them
know it's coming.
Follow the step-by-step instructions on the screen. The Feedback Wizard gradually brings up the Master Fader. As it does, feedback ring
frequencies will emerge. The Feedback Wizard will identify the frequency and automatically apply a notch filter. You may continue the process until
the Feedback Wizard has used up all Anti-Feedback Filters or you may touch “Done” or “Anti-Feedback Wizard” at any point. Typically, eliminating
five or six feedback frequencies should be sufficient.
1001108-01-F
17
Licensed to Kill Feedback
The Feedback Wizard algorithm is looking for suspected feedback frequencies even when the Wizard isn’t active. The most recently identified
suspect frequency is displayed in the “Feedback Frequency” window. Simply touch the Manual button and an Anti-Feedback Filter will be
Kill
applied to the frequency.
Lingering Feedback Problems
If you have used the Wizard or Manual Kill function to apply all anti-feedback filters and your system is still unstable (prone to feedback) there are
several other possibilities…
• Improper microphone selection or placement.
• Improper microphone technique.
• The performer is cupping the head of the microphone because he’s seen the cool guys on videos do it. This actually turns a directional
microphone into an omni-directional microphone and destroys any off-axis feedback rejection the microphone has.
• Or an inexperienced talker is holding a hand-held microphone at chest level while pacing in front of the speakers.
• Improper loudspeaker selection or placement.
• Unrealistic expectations. If you point a microphone at a loudspeaker and increase the gain enough, it will eventually feed back.
• Excessive EQ boost elsewhere in the signal chain.
• Compressor latch
More about the Anti-Feedback System
At the bottom of the Anti-Feedback screen is a “Filter Depth” control. This can be used to vary the depth of all the Anti-Feedback Filters.
The Feedback Wizard and Manual Kill function will not readjust a filter that has already been set. They will only use an Anti-Feedback Filter that is
set to 0.0 dB Cut. If all twelve filters are already in use neither function will have any effect. To make an Anti-Feedback Filter available for the Wizard
or Manual Kill function, simply rotate the gain of a filter to 0.0 dB or touch the “Reset” button to zero all filters (be careful when you do this because
you may be removing the filters that have been preventing feedback).
Filters are applied in the order that feedback frequencies are identified and do not correlate to the left to right arrangement of the controls. This
means that Filter 1 could be applied to a high-frequency while Filter 12 is applied to a very low frequency. The filter controls and on-screen
indicators are numbered and color-coded for easy identification.
There are anti-feedback systems that actively search for and filter feedback in real-time during performance and they can be quite effective for
speech applications. These systems can struggle with music because it’s difficult to tell the difference between unwanted sound system feedback
and desired electric guitar feedback or a sustained note on an organ or synthesizer.
Real Time Analyzer (RTA)
An audio Real Time Analyzer breaks the spectrum into frequency bands – 1/3 octave bands for the TouchMix RTA – and displays the amplitude of
the signal in each band. It is useful for visualizing the frequency balance of a signal and for identifying feedback frequencies.
TIP: The TouchMix mixers also include a noise generator. Some may attempt to use the noise generator, output EQ and RTA to “tune”
the system for “flat” response. This is an overly simplistic approach to system tuning and will rarely if ever deliver the desired results.
In addition, the prolonged output of noise can stress loudspeakers and annoy others. Please see “Tuning Wizard” for a more useful
approach to dialing in your rig.
The TouchMix contains two 31-band, Real Time Analyzers. These may be displayed on any combination of the mixer and tablet devices but only two
RTA are available at one time. If an operator attempts to open a 3rd instance of the RTA, a confirmation prompt will appear.
One RTA (the Channel RTA) is available on all input and output EQ screens and may be displayed by touching the “RTA On” button located above the
EQ / RTA window.
NOTE: When the RTA is not enabled, the Parametric EQ screen is enlarged to occupy both the RTA and PEQ screen area.
The second RTA (the Independent RTA) can be displayed by pushing the RTA button on the mixer or touching the RTA button on the remote control
app. This RTA offers options for source selection. The user may select…
•
•
•
•
The Main L/R signal
The signal from any Auxiliary mix
The Talkback microphone input
Follow Cue (whatever is heard in the Cue bus is displayed on the RTA)
NOTE: The TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 RTA is similar in operation but only a single RTA is available.
1001108-01-F
18
Mutes
The TouchMix has a sophisticated and powerful Mute system. In addition to the Mute Groups (See "Mute Groups" on page 6) inputs and
individual channel sends to individual aux mixes may be muted independently.
Main Mutes: When a channel is muted while the Main L/R is selected, the channel is also muted to all Auxiliary and FX mixes. This is true whether
the channel was muted using the channel Mute button or a Mute Group.
Auxiliary Mutes: It is sometimes useful to mute an individual input to only one auxiliary mix. When an Auxiliary is selected by touching one of the
buttons on the left of the screen, the Mute button that is displayed with the channel faders will effect only the selected auxiliary mix.
The Mute buttons have three states…
•
Mute
: Indicates the channel is not muted.
•
Mute
:
»» With Main L/R mix selected, indicates that the channel has been muted by pressing the channel Mute button. The
channel’s signal is also muted for all auxiliary sends.
»» With Auxiliary mix selected, indicates that the channel is muted for the currently selected Auxiliary mix. This affects
only the muted channel and only for the selected Aux mix.
•
Mute
:
This is an indication that the channel is muted by something other than the Mute button you’re seeing.
»» With Main L/R mix selected, indicates that the channel is muted from a Mute Group, or DCA Group*.
»» With Auxiliary mix selected, indicates that the channel is muted from a Mute Group, DCA Group or at the Main L/R
mix.
»» For FX Returns, indicates that the channel is muted from a Mute Group, DCA Group or FX Mute button
NOTE: *A DCA mute will not mute an auxiliary send that is set to a pre-fader pick-off point.
1001108-01-F
19
Copy & Paste
The TouchMix-30 Pro has a powerful but simple copy and paste function that is operated by the U7 (copy) and U8 (paste) buttons (U2 and U3 on
the TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16). Copy and Paste is context sensitive so that what you are looking at is what will be copied. Only like things may
be copied and pasted from and to each other. For example, a PEQ cannot be pasted to a GEQ. The table below explains what parameters will be
copied and pasted.
NOTE: The copy buffer retains the last item of each type that has been copied. If, for example a GEQ setting is copied and then a
Gate is copied, both will reside in memory. If a GEQ is displayed, Paste will recall the copied GEQ parameters. If a Gate is displayed,
Gate parameters will be pasted.
Paste
Copy
Aux Masters
To copy and paste parameters:
Aux 1
U7
Aux 5
U8
The example above shows the mix that’s on Auxiliary 1 copied to Auxiliary 5.
After set-up is complete, it may be useful to clear the Copy/Paste buffer. This will prevent accidentally pasting parameters during the show. To clear
the Copy/Paste memory:
To clear the Copy/Paste buffer:
Menu
What’s Displayed
Yes
Clear Copy/Paste
What will be copied & pasted
Main or Auxiliary Faders View
Fader and Pan
Input Channel Overview Tab
EQ, Compressor, Gate, FX sends, Aux Sends, Digital Gain, Delay, Group
Assigns, Polarity
Input Channel EQ Tab
All channel EQ parameters
Input Channel Comp Tab
All channel Compressor parameters
Input Channel Gate Tab
All channel Gate parameters
Input Channel FX Tab
All channel FX send levels
Input Channel Aux Tab
All channel Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions
Input Channel Setup Tab
Recording Arm, Polarity, Delay, Digital Gain, Group assignments
Output Channel Overview Tab
PEQ, Limiter, FX sends, Aux Sends, Delay, Group Assigns, Polarity, PickOff Point (Auxes only)
Output Channel PEQ Tab
All channel PEQ parameters
Output Channel GEQ Tab
All channel GEQ parameters
Output Channel Anti-Feedback Tab
All channel Anti-feedback parameters
Output Channel Limiter Tab
All channel Limiter parameters
Output Channel FX Tab
All channel FX send levels
Output Channel Aux Tab
All channel Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions
Output Channel Setup Tab
Recording Arm, Polarity, Delay, Digital Gain, Group assignments
FX Channel Overview Tab
Current Preset, EQ, Pick-Off Point, Group Assigns, Polarity
FX Channel EQ Tab
All FX channel EQ parameters
FX Channel Preset Tab
Processor and Preset selection, FX Returns and Pans to Aux
FX Channel Aux Tab
All FX Channel Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions
Sub Group Overview Tab
PEQ, Limiter, FX sends, Aux Sends, Group Assigns
Sub Group EQ Tab
All Sub Group PEQ parameters
Sub Group Limiter Tab
All Sub Group Limiter parameters
Sub Group FX Tab
All Sub Group FX send levels
Sub Group Aux Tab
All Sub Group Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions
1001108-01-F
20
Patch Matrix (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
The Patch Matrix is a powerful tool but it is also one that can create problems. Make sure you clearly understand this function before attempting to
use it.
The TouchMix-30 Pro has audio inputs plus a set of graphical controls and processing for each audio channel. Let’s call these “Inputs” and
“Channels”. By default, the audio for Input 1 is controlled and processed by Channel 1, Input 2 is controlled and processed by Channel 2 and…,
well you get the idea.
There are occasions when it is useful to route an Input to an alternate Channel. Before you do, there are a few things to understand.
• The Patch Matrix only effects the digital audio signal. So rerouting Input 1 to Channel 6 does not change the fact that input gain trim still has to
be set using the Trim 1 control.
• Unless you keep track of the changes you’ve made, altering the default patching can make signal tracing confusing. You know the microphone is
connected to Input 1 but why isn’t there any signal showing up on Channel 1?
That said, there are some reasons to use the Patch Matrix. The first is simply to rearrange the order in which inputs appear on the controls. Before
making a change on the Patch Matrix, ask yourself if it wouldn’t be easier and potentially less confusing to physically re-patch the input. If the
answer is no, here’s how to proceed.
To access the Patch Matrix:
Patch Matrix
Menu
NOTE: When the Patch Matrix is loaded for the first time after the mixer was powered on, it may take a few moments to display. The
Patch Matrix displays the Analog Inputs across the top of the screen and the Destination Channels down the right side. Connection is
indicated with lines and a blue circle.
To change a connection:
• Touch the button of the
• Touch the Channel
Input
5
8 In 8
»» The Channel changes to
you want to re-patch. The button changes
Input
5
.
where you want to route the input.
8 In 5
, the lines and blue circle move to indicate the new routing.
• To route the input to a second Channel, touch
input.
11 In 5
of the second Channel to which you want to route the
• If you make a mistake in selecting a Channel, simply touch it again to restore the previous routing.
• Touch the input button to complete the re-patch.
TIP: Why would one want to route the same input to two Channels? This is known as “Multing”. The term comes from old-school
analog patch bays that had some jacks wired so that a single signal could be patched to multiple destinations. Here’s an example
of how it’s used. Let’s say you’ve got an acoustic guitar on stage and you’ve dialed it in for the main speaker system. But no matter
what you do, you can’t get it to sound right in the monitors without compromising the sound the audience hears. You could use an XLR
Y-Cable to patch the guitar into two mixer channels, or you could use the Patch Matrix to mult the guitar to a second Channel. Send
that channel only to the performer’s stage monitor and adjust as needed to make our demanding guitarist happy.
To reset the Patch Matrix to default routing:
Menu
Patch Matrix
Patch Matrix settings may also be saved and recalled using the
1001108-01-F
21
Save / Recall
Reset
button.
Reset
Room Tuning Wizard
The Tuning Wizard assists the operator in adjusting an output equalizer to compensate for variations in room acoustics and loudspeaker response.
The three TouchMix models handle measurement microphone connection in slightly differing ways.
TouchMix-30 Pro
The measurement microphone is connected to the Talkback input and is controlled entirely from within the Room Tuning Wizard.
TouchMix-8 or TouchMix-16
For these mixers the microphone is connected to input 8 (TouchMix-8) or input 16 (TouchMix-16). When the Room Tuning Wizard is opened,
channel 8 (or 16) is automatically muted and its input signal is routed to the Room Tuning Wizard. The measurement microphone may then be
connected to input 8 (or 16) and the Room Tuning process may be run. Upon completion, the input channel is muted to allow disconnection of the
measurement microphone and re-connection of the instrument previously connected. The input 8 (or 16) channel mute can then be lifted by the
operator. The Room Tuning Wizard has no effect on the input channel settings.
Before proceeding with the Tuning Wizard, listen to your system in the room using material with which you are familiar. Many contemporary
loudspeaker systems – especially powered loudspeakers such as the QSC K.2, K, KW and KLA series – have been carefully tuned by design and
will sound very good with little or no additional equalization.
That said, here’s how to use the Room Tuning Wizard. Before you begin, you will need a measurement microphone with flat response, a microphone
stand and a microphone cable that’s long enough to reach from the mixer to the coverage area of the speakers being measured.
When using the Room Tuning Wizard, it’s best to do so before applying any of the output channel’s parametric EQ or Anti-Feedback filters.
To access the Room Tuning Wizard:
Wizard
Tuning Wizard
OR
Aux Masters
GEQ
Aux 1
3.
Select an output to tune
4.
Select a measurement method.
Tuning Wizard
Aux 2
Low Precision
(Fast)
OR
Medium Precision
OR
High Precision
OR
Skip Measurement
(Use Previous)
NOTE: The Low Precision method uses just a single measurement while the Medium and High Precision methods require
multiple measurements and repositioning of the microphone. The Skip Measurement method will retain the results of the last
measurement but allow selection of one of the other target tuning curves that we’ll discuss in a moment.
5. Touch
Next
. The wizard displays instructions and a guide to microphone placement.
NOTE: Most measurement microphones are condenser microphones and require phantom power which may be switched on from
the Room Tuning Wizard screen.
6. Enable
Talkback Mic Phantom Off
7. Touch
1001108-01-F
Begin
On
if needed.
.
22
Noise
Level
8.
Follow the directions and adjust the
9.
Touch Measure . The mixer produces the test signal and captures the measurement data.
-13.5 dB
so that the RTA displays a moderate level of activity.
NOTE: Each output of a TouchMix mixer actually has two graphic equalizers. One is used by the Tuning Wizard to apply corrections
based on the measurement data. Settings for this equalizer are indicated by the outlined or “ghost” fader caps on the GEQ screen. The
other equalizer may be adjusted by the user.
10. Select a target tuning.
»» Select
Flat
– The wizard flattens the system response using the Tuning EQ and sets the user EQ to flat. You
can adjust to taste from there.
»» Select
Live
– The wizard flattens the system response and applies a User EQ setting that works well for live
sound reinforcement systems.
»» Select
Keep Existing
– The wizard flattens the system response using the Tuning EQ but leaves the user EQ settings
untouched.
11. Touch
Restart
if the measurement is interrupted by, for example, unexpected, loud ambient noise. Perform the
measurement again.
12. Touch
Finish
to continue.
13. Touch Navigate To GEQ to view the GEQ settings.
1001108-01-F
23
User Buttons
The TouchMix-30 Pro has eight user-assignable buttons (U1 – U8) while the TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 have four (U1 – U4). The remote control
apps for all models provide 8 user buttons. The following are assigned by default:
TouchMix-30 Pro
TouchMix-8 / TouchMix-16
•
U1
– Navigate Left (moves the selection left)
•
U1
– Navigate Left (moves the selection left)
•
U2
– Clear Clip (clears clipping indication from the Navigation Strip)
•
U2
– Copy (see Copy & Paste)
•
U3
– Clear Cue (clears all cue selections)
•
U3
– Paste (see Copy & Paste)
•
U4
– Navigate Right (moves the selection right)
•
U4
– Navigate Right (moves the selection right)
•
U5
– Play/Stop (starts or stops playback)
•
U5
– Play/Stop (Tablet app only)
•
U6
– Rec/Stop (starts or stops recording)
•
U6
– Rec/Stop (Tablet app only)
•
U7
– Copy (see Copy & Paste)
•
U7
– Clear Clip (Tablet app only)
•
U8
– Paste (see Copy & Paste)
•
U8
– Clear Cue (Tablet app only)
The User Buttons may be reprogrammed to suit your preferences.
To program a User Button:
To complete the programming:
User 1
User Buttons
Menu
Assign
Action
Nav Left
Assign
Name
Selection
Detail
Type Name
NOTE: The Name displays on the tablet app User Buttons.
Touch the
Reset
button to restore the default assignments.
TIP: For instant navigation to a particular screen, there’s a simple shortcut method to program a User Button. Let’s say that you
want to be able to get to the input channel overview of the lead singer’s channel (channel 12) quickly. Simply navigate to the Channel
12 Overview tab and hold a User Button for two seconds. Touch “Yes” and the User Button will now take you to the Channel 12
Overview screen no matter where you are.
MIDI Control
A USB-over-MIDI device such as a foot switch may be used to control some TouchMix-30 Pro functions. MIDI Control is similar in function to User
Buttons.
MIDI 1
MIDI Setup
1.
To program MIDI Control:
2.
With a compatible MIDI device connected to the mixer, touch
3.
Send a MIDI command to the mixer and that command will now be associated with the selected MIDI button.
4.
To assign a function to the "learned" button:
1001108-01-F
Menu
Not in use
Action
Learn MIDI
Selection
24
.
Detail
Security
The TouchMix mixers have multi-level security that allows you to assign passwords to various levels of functionality. You can give users access to
only the functions they are authorized to use.
To set up Security:
Menu
Security
Security Settings
IMPORTANT: Leaving a password field empty allows anyone to access the associated functions without any log-in. The Security
Setup menu offers four levels of access:
• Administrator:
Logging in as Administrator gives access to all mixer functions including Security Settings. If the mixer is accessible to others, it may be a good
idea to enter an administrator password to prevent mischievous or inadvertent password creation that would lock you out of your own mixer. Be
certain you can remember this password!
• All Access:
• No password: Anyone can access all functions other than Security Setup.
• Password protected: Access to Advanced functions requires password log-in.
• Simple Mode Only:
• No password: Anyone can access all functions (other than Security Setup) in Simple Mode only.
• Password protected: Access to all Simple Mode functions requires log-in.
• Levels Only:
In order to password protect the mixer from any unauthorized adjustment, create a password for this level.
• No password: Anyone can adjust level controls only.
• Password protected: Access to level controls requires log-in.
Further restriction can be placed on each access level.
• Overwrite Scenes & Presets: Allows or denies the ability to change a Scene or Preset in user memory.
• Recall Scenes: Allows or denies the ability to recall a scene from memory.
• Recall Presets: Allows or denies the ability to recall a preset from memory.
• Auto-lock: Sets a timer that automatically logs out after a preset period (up to 25 hours) with no activity at the mixer controls.
To manually log-out of the mixer.
1001108-01-F
Menu
Lock/Logout
Security
25
Monitor (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Monitor
The monitor output is most commonly used to feed a pair of monitor loudspeakers.
To adjust Monitor level:
Monitor
Use the Master Rotary Encoder.
Source
10
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
The monitor pop-up includes the following controls:
5
• Source Selector – Selects a signal for the Monitor output.
»» Aux 1 through 14 – The monitor output signal is derived form the
selected Aux mix.
Aux 9
»» Main LR – The monitor output signal is derived from the Main L/R output.
Aux 13
U
-5
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 12
-10
Aux 14
Main LR
Cue
-20
»» Cue – The monitor output follows the Cue selection.
• In – Engages / bypasses the delay.
Delay
• Delay – The delay is used to align the audio coming from a distant stage
with the near-field monitor signal heard at the mixer position. Digital
readouts are in feet, milliseconds, and meters.
0.00 ms
In
-40
0.00 feet
0.00 m
Touch Close or push
Monitor
to close the pop-up.
Close
Monitor (TouchMix-16 only)
Controls the output level for the Monitor Cue
To adjust Monitor level:
Monitor
Use the Master Rotary Encoder.
Monitor / Cue Level – Controls the level of the Cue signal on the Monitor outputs.
NOTE: By default, no audio signal is sent to the Monitor Outputs. To send
audio channel signals (including Main LR) to the Monitor Outputs, enable the Cue
button for the channels you want to listen to.
Touch Close or push
Monitor
to close the pop-up.
Solo In Place (SIP) (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
When setting up a sound system, it can be very useful to mute all the inputs except for the one being worked on. This could be accomplished by
manually muting all the other channels but there’s a more convenient way.
To set up Solo In Place:
Menu
Mixer Setup
Solo in Place
When Solo In Place is engaged, the input channels’ Cue buttons change color to light red and are labelled SIP. Touching a channel’s SIP button will
mute all the other input channels and the SIP button turns solid green. Multiple inputs may be soloed. The Cue system functions normally for the
mixer’s outputs.
The Solo In Place function does not affect FX returns. This means that when an input channel is soloed, any effect routed to that channel will still be
heard in the mix. If it is desirable to hear a channel soloed without effects, the FX Mute button may be used to mute all effects independently.
IMPORTANT: Solo In Place (SIP) is an extremely useful function for setup and troubleshooting but can be hazardous during a show.
Be certain to disengage Solo In Place when setup is complete.
1001108-01-F
26
TouchMix Reference
The information provided in this section gives you a detailed description of the screens and controls for the TouchMix-30 Pro and the
TouchMix-30 Pro remote apps. The screen shots provided are taken from the TouchMix-30 Pro iPad App, and because of a different screen size,
may appear slightly different than the TouchMix-30 Pro screens. The topics are in the order of the Info menu buttons on the mixer.
Getting Started
Top Panel and Remote-Device
Controls (TouchMix-30 Pro)
1.
2.
3.
1
Cue
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
3
4
Stereo Input
29/30
Trim knobs – Channels 1 – 24 adjusts analog input
signal level prior to A/D conversion.
TouchMix - 30 Pro
Color LCD touchscreen
5
Cue headphone jack – 1/4” stereo headphone
15
jack. The output is controlled by clicking the Cue button on
6
7
8
2
a channel. Volume is controlled by pressing the Phones
16
9
10 11
button on the front panel.
17
12
13
14
Stereo Input 29/30 jack − Channels 29 and
18
30 are permanently linked. The input is a 3.5 mm stereo phone
21
jack.
19
5
User buttons – By default, these eight buttons are
20
assigned the following functions:
a. U1 – Navigate left from the currently selected item
b. U2 – Clear clip indicators
c. U3 – Clear Cue indicators
My Network
d. U4 – Navigate right from the currently selected item
15
e. U5 – Play button for the currently selected Play-back file.
f. U6 – Record button starts recording audio on the selected recording setup
16 Menu
g. U7 – Copy the selected item
h. U8 – Paste the copied item to another item of the same type
17 Rec / Play
Wizard button – Starts the TouchMix wizard. Choices are: FX Wizard, Tuning Wizard, Gain Wizard.
Anti18 Feedback
Mic 48V button – Opens the Phantom Power screen. Turn Phantom Power on/off and view status for all channels.
19 RTA
Info button – Opens the Info System but you already knew that or you wouldn’t be reading this.
Aux button – Opens the Aux overview screen.
Mic 48V
7
10 FX Mute
FX Mute – Mutes or unmutes all FX channels.
Info
6 Wizard
8
Mute Groups – Opens a screen where Mute groups may be controlled and edit
Mute
Phones button – Push to display and select the Phones / Cue level control.
9 Aux
11
Groups
Talk button – Momentary button that, when held down, opens the microphone connected to the Talkback mic input on the
22
rear panel. The Talkback feature configuration is accessed from the Menu.
Follow
Monitor button – Push to display and select the Monitor / Cue level control.
13 Talk
24
Mixer
Home button – Returns to the main screen with the fader bank (top navigation) and Aux (left navigation) in their selected
Monitor
12 Phones
14
positions.
Menu button – Opens the Menu screen displaying a choice of menu options, including Mixer Setup.
a Nav Left Clear Clip b
Record/Play button − Opens the record playback screen displaying controls and options.
Anti-Feedback button – Opens the Anti-Feedback screen for the selected output.
c Clear Cue Nav Right d
5
RTA button – Displays one of the mixer’s two Real Time Analyzer.
Record/
Play/Stop
f
Stop
Master encoder – Not available on remote devices. Changes values or position of selected control and scrolls through lists. Press e
Paste
g Copy
while turning to make fine adjustments.
h
ø (Zero) button – Press to move a control to its 0 (zero) position.
Zero
Fine
Nudge buttons – Use these buttons to increment selected controls.
23
21 0
Fine button – Available only on remote tablets. Press to make the nudge button increments smaller.
Follow Mixer button – In this mode, the Remote Device defaults to the Overview screen of the currently selected channel.
When you change channels on the mixer, the remote device follows to the new channel and displays the new channel’s Overview screen. You
can change to any of the other channel screens. In addition, you can select a control on the remote device and use the Master encoder knob
to change the selected control.
U5
U6
Copy
Paste
U7
U8
Home
4.
Wizard
Mic
48V
Info
Menu
Aux
FX
Mute
Mute
Groups
Rec/
Play
Phones
Talkback
Talk
Monitor
Anti-
Feedback
0
U2
RTA
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
1001108-01-F
U1
27
U3
U4
Rear Panel (TouchMix-30 Pro)
1.
Standby – Press to enter or exit Standby. A confirmation screen displays when entering Standby.
2.
USB – 3.0, Type A For attaching USB storage devices1, MIDI2 foot switch, Wi-Fi adapter, External Control Surfaces or upgrading the
mixer firmware.
USB – Type B For attaching a Mac-based DAW. The Mac must be running OS Yosemite or later.
Ethernet – RJ45 For connecting to a network with wireless capability.
AC Mains – power connection, 100-240 V, ~85 W, 50/60 Hz
3.
4.
5.
CAUTION!:
6.
7.
If AC power is removed, wait for 5 seconds before reapplying the AC power.
Analog Inputs 1 through
20 – Balanced XLR female
connectors
1
12
11
10
9
6
Analog Inputs 21 through
24 – Balanced XLR / 1/4” TRS
2
7
female combination connectors
3
Stereo Inputs 25 - 30
4
TRS – Two female balanced
12
13
8
9
linked inputs per stereo pair. Odd
number is left side, even number
5
11
is right side. Stereo pair 29/30
shared with 3.5 mm TRS on top
10
panel.
Cue Phones, Aux 13/14,
and Aux 11/12 – Stereo
female TRS 1/4” outputs
K Lock® Security Slot – Compatible with the MicroSaver Security Cable
Talkback microphone – Balanced female XLR, 48 V phantom power available
Monitor Left and Right – Balanced male XLR outputs
Main Left and Right – Balanced male XLR outputs
Auxiliary outputs 1 through 14 – Balanced male XLRs
Analog Inputs
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Standby
USB
24
23
22
21
USB DAW
8.
Ethernet
Stereo Inputs
Cue
Phones
Aux
13/14
L 25/26 R
L 27/28 R
www.qsc.com
Talkback
Mains
(48V Selectable)
100 -240V ~85W 50/60Hz
L 29/30 R
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Aux
11/12
Monitor
Left
Right
Main Mix
Left
14
Aux Outputs
Right
1
Drives must be formatted using the FAT32 file system. A FAT32 format utility is accessible from the Recording Setup screen. For best results use 7200
RPM, USB 3 hard drives or high-speed SSD. Drive performance is critical for recording. For more information and to see a list of qualified drives, visit qsc.
com. At this time, the TouchMix-30 Pro-30 supports playback of MP3 digital audio files from the USB port, and exporting the recorded 2-Track files to the
MP3 format.
2
The TouchMix supports “class compliant” USB MIDI devices. QSC has verified proper operation with these USB MIDI footswitches: iCON G-BOARD and
Logidy UMI3
1001108-01-F
28
Left Side of the TouchMix-16 Mixing Surface
1.
Rear Panel labels
2.
3.
Balanced female XLR inputs (1–12)
Trim − Channels 1–16 adjusts input signal level
prior to A/D conversion
Color LCD touchscreen
Balanced female XLR and 1/4” TRS combo
inputs (13‑16). The TRS connectors supply a +10dB
pad.
Home – Navigates up the menu structure to the
Home screen
Menu – Displays a choice of menu options,
including Mixer Setup.
Record/Play − Displays recording controls and
options.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1
Aux 1
2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Main Left
Main Right
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Talkback
5
3
10
9
Trim
11
Trim
12
Trim
13
Trim
14
Trim
15
Trim
16
Trim
Trim
Home
6
7
8
Menu
Record/
Play
4
Left Side of the TouchMix-8 Mixing Surface
1.
Rear Panel labels.
2.
Balanced female XLR and 1/4” TRS combo
inputs (1–4). The TRS connectors supply a +10dB
pad.
1
Aux 1
5.
6.
7.
8.
Balanced female XLR inputs (5–8).
Trim − Channels 1–8 adjusts input signal level prior
to A/D conversion.
Color LCD touchscreen
Home – Navigates up the menu structure to the
Home screen
Menu – Displays a choice of menu options,
including Mixer Setup.
Record/Play − Displays recording controls and options.
1001108-01-F
2
1
Aux 3
3
Aux 4
4
Main Left
5
Main Right
6
Phones
7
8
2
3
4
1
2
Trim
NOTE: Inputs 1 & 2 may be switched to
Hi-Z for use with guitars and other
instruments having passive pick-up systems.
See Channel 1 or 2 Setup for more
information.
3.
4.
Aux 2
3
Trim
4
Trim
5
Trim
6
Trim
7
Trim
8
Trim
Trim
Home
6
5
29
Menu
7
Record/
Play
8
Right Side of the TouchMix-16
Mixing Surface
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
¼” TRS inputs (17/18 and 19/20)
– Line level, stereo.
¼” TRS outputs Aux (7/8 &
9/10) – For line-level / in-ear monitors. May
be configured as mono, balanced line-level
outputs.
¼” TRS output Cue – For stereo Cue
headphones.
Phantom +48V – Displays input channel
Phantom Power buttons.
Wizard – Links to wizards that assist with
various tasks.
Auxes – A shortcut to the Aux Mix screen.
¼” TRS output Monitor – For stereo
control-room loudspeakers.
Power (Standby) – Takes the mixer in
and out of Standby.
IMPORTANT!: Before removing
power (unplugging) press the
Standby button to put the mixer in
Standby.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
TouchMix-16
1
Stereo In
17/18
Stereo In
19/20
2
Aux Out
7/8
Aux Out
9/10
3
Monitor
4
Cue
Phantom +48V
5
6
Wizard
Info
FX
Mute
Auxes
27
7
8
9
Mute
Groups
10
11
12
Talkback
Level
Phones
Talk
Monitor
13
0
14
23
User
U3
17
User
U4
24
28
Menu
29
Rec / Play
30
AntiFeedback
31
RTA
11
FX Mute
Mic 48V
5
Wizard
Info
9
6
Aux
Mute
Groups
10
4
25
Level
User
Info – Displays the menu of help topics. In
addition, you can change the language of the info
16 U2
system from the Info Menu.
User
Mute Groups – Displays Mute Group
15
U1
controls and setup options.
FX Mute – Mutes all four FX outputs.
Phones Level – Displays Phones level
control, use Master Control to adjust.
Talk – Enables the Talkback microphone press/hold to talk.
Monitor Level – Displays Monitor level,
use Master Control to adjust.
U1 – User Button – Factory default selects the next control to
the left.
U2 – User Button – Factory default Copy
U3 – User Button – Factory default Paste
U4 – User Button – Factory default selects the next control to
the right.
U5 – User Button – Factory default Play / Stop (remote device
only)
U6 – User Button – Factory default Record / Stop (remote
device only)
U7 – User Button – Factory default Clear Clip (remote device
only)
U8 – User Button – Factory default Clear Cue (remote device
only)
Ø – Returns the selected control to its default position.
Master Control – Adjusts the selected parameter,
press & turn for fine adjustments.
1001108-01-F
Power
My Network
18
13
Talk
Follow
Mixer
32
12
Phones
Monitor
14
15
Nav Left
Copy
16
17
Paste
Nav Right
18
19
Play/Stop
Record/
Stop
20
21
Clear Clip
Clear Cue
22
Fine
26
Zero
Press for fine
23
0
25. Nudge (+/-) – Increases or decreases the value setting of
the currently selected parameter.
26. Control Mode – Changes the granularity of the Nudge
control.
27. Home – Navigates up the menu structure to the Home screen.
28. Menu – Displays a choice of menu options, including Mixer
Setup.
29. Record/Play − Displays recording controls and options.
30. Anti-Feedback button – Opens the Anti-Feedback
screen for the selected output.
31. RTA button – Displays the Real Time Analyzer. There is
only one instance of the RTA. It can display on the remote tablet
device, or the mixer screen, not both at the same time.
32. Follow Mixer button – In this mode, the Remote
Device defaults to the Overview screen of the currently selected
channel. When you change channels on the mixer, the remote
device follows to the new channel and displays the new
channel’s Overview screen. You can change to any of the other
channel screens. In addition, you can select a control on the
remote device and use the Master encoder knob to change the
selected control.
30
Right Side of the TouchMix-8
Mixing Surface
1.
2.
TouchMix-8
My Network
1
¼” TRS inputs (9/10 and 11/12) – Line level,
stereo.
Phantom +48V – Displays input channel Phantom Power
buttons.
2
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Power (Standby) – Takes the mixer in and out of
Standby.
Auxes – A shortcut to the Aux Mix screen.
Wizard – Links to wizards that assist with various tasks.
Info – Displays the menu of help topics. In addition, you can
change the language of the info system from the Info Menu.
Phones – Displays Phones level control, use Master Control
to adjust.
Mute Groups – Displays Mute Group controls and setup
options.
FX Mute – Mutes all four FX outputs.
Ø – Returns the selected control to its default position.
U1 – User Button – Factory default selects the next control to
the left.
U2 – User Button – Factory default Copy
U3 – User Button – Factory default Paste
U4 – User Button – Factory default selects the next control to
the right.
U5 – User Button – Factory default Play / Stop (remote device
only)
U6 – User Button – Factory default Record / Stop (remote
device only)
U7 – User Button – Factory default Clear Clip (remote device
only)
U8 – User Button – Factory default Clear Cue (remote device
only)
Master Control – Adjusts the selected parameter, press
& turn for fine adjustments.
Nudge (+/-) – Increases or decreases the value setting of
the currently selected parameter.
Control Mode – Changes the granularity of the Nudge
control.
Home – Navigates up the menu structure to the
Home screen.
1001108-01-F
Stereo In
11/12
+48V
Phantom
Power
22
3
5
IMPORTANT!: Before removing power
(unplugging) press the Standby button to put the
mixer in Standby.
3.
Stereo In
9/10
4
Aux
Wizard
Phones
Mute
Groups
Info
6
8
7
12
U2
User
11
10
0
U1
FX
Mute
U3
9
13
User
U4
14
23
Menu
24
Rec / Play
25
AntiFeedback
26
RTA
9
FX Mute
5
Wizard
Info
6
Aux
Mute
Groups
8
4
Mic 48V
2
20
19
Press for f ine
13
Talk
Follow
Mixer
27
7
Phones
Monitor
14
11
Nav Left
Copy
12
13
Paste
Nav Right
14
15
Play/Stop
Record/
Stop
16
17
Clear Clip
Clear Cue
18
Fine
21
Zero
10
0
23. Menu – Displays a choice of menu options, including Mixer
Setup.
24. Record/Play − Displays recording controls and options.
25. Anti-Feedback button – Opens the Anti-Feedback
screen for the selected output.
26. RTA button – Displays the Real Time Analyzer. There is
only one instance of the RTA. It can display on the remote tablet
device, or the mixer screen, not both at the same time.
27. Follow Mixer button – In this mode, the Remote
Device defaults to the Overview screen of the currently selected
channel. When you change channels on the mixer, the remote
device follows to the new channel and displays the new
channel’s Overview screen. You can change to any of the other
channel screens. In addition, you can select a control on the
remote device and use the Master encoder knob to change the
selected control.
31
Rear Panel (TouchMix-16)
Power
Talkback
3
4
Main Right
Main Left
Aux 6
Aux 5
Aux 4
Aux 3
Aux 2
Aux 1
USB
®
1
2
5
6
1.
USB 3.0, Type A – For attaching USB storage devices1, MIDI2 foot switch, and Wi-Fi adapter.
2.
K & Lock® Security Slot – Compatible with the MicroSaver Security Cable
3.
Power Supply – Use the power supply delivered with the mixer, do not substitute.
4.
Talkback microphone – Balanced female XLR
5.
Main Right and Left output – Balanced male XLRs
6.
Auxiliary outputs 1 through 6 – Balanced male XLRs
Rear Panel (TouchMix-8)
Power
USB
Phones
®
Aux 3/4
Right
1
2
3
4
Left
4
3
6
5
2
1
7
1.
USB 3.0, Type A – For attaching USB storage devices1, MIDI2 foot switch, and Wi-Fi adapter.
2.
K & Lock® Security Slot – Compatible with the MicroSaver Security Cable
3.
Power Supply – Use the power supply delivered with the mixer, do not substitute.
4.
Phones – Stereo 1/4” TRS. Line or headphone output is directed to this output when a channel Cue is activated.
5.
Aux 3/4 – Stereo 1/4” TRS. Line or in-ear output. This output is wired in parallel with Aux 3 and 4 XLRs.
6.
Main Right and Left output – Balanced male XLRs
7.
Auxiliary outputs 1 through 4 – Balanced male XLRs
1
Drives must be formatted using the FAT32 file system. For best results use 7200 RPM, USB 3 hard drives or high-speed SSD. Drive performance is
critical for recording. For more information and to see a list of qualified drives, visit qsc.com. At this time, the TouchMix does not support importing or reimporting digital audio files that have been created or edited on another device.
2
The TouchMix supports “class compliant” USB MIDI devices. QSC has verified proper operation with these USB MIDI footswitches: iCON G-BOARD and
Logidy UMI3
1001108-01-F
32
TouchMix-30 Pro Specifications
Parameter
Specification
Display
Inputs
10” (254mm) diagonal, 1024 x 600 pixel, color TFT, capacitive multi-touch sensing
Total 32
20 Mic/Line, XLR, 48V Phantom Power
4 Mic/Line, XLR/TRS combo, 48V Phantom Power
6 Line (1/4” TRS + 1/8” (3.5 mm) TRS top panel)
USB MP3 Playback (Type A rear panel)
Outputs
1 Talkback (XLR with 48 V)
22 Total
2 Main L/R (XLR)
14 Aux Outputs (XLR)
2 In-ear Monitor (Stereo) (1/4” TRS from Auxes 11/12 and 13/14)
1 Cue (Stereo) (1/4” TRS)
Digital Connections
2 Monitor (Stereo) (XLR)
2 USB A connector,
1 USB B connector,
Input Channel Processing
1 RJ-45 (connection for Wi-Fi router)
4-band Parametric EQ with Hi/Low Shelving Option
Variable 24 dB/octave HPF and LPF
Gate
Compressor
Effects (FX)
Delay (100 msec max)
6 FX Engines
Reverb
Echo
Delay
Chorus
Output Channel Processing
Pitch Shift (assignable to a single mono input channel)
1/3 Octave Graphic EQ (Main L/R, Aux 1 - 14 )
Parametric EQ (Main L/R, Aux 1 - 14)
Notch Filters (12-bands, all outputs)
100 msec. Delay, (all outputs)
Limiter (all outputs)
Sub Group Processing
HPF & LPF (all outputs)
6-band PEQ
HPF, LPF
Recording/Playback
Compressor / Limiter
USB Direct to Hard Drive multi-track (32 x 32)
DAW / Computer interface 32 x 32 channel USB audio interface to Windows and macOS computers.
Groups
Stereo MP3 Playback from USB
8 DCA
8 Mute
Cue
8 Sub Groups
Selectable
AFL
PFL
Real Time Analyzer
Solo in Place
2 x 1/3 octave
1 assigned to the selected channel
Wizards
1001108-01-F
1 with user selectable source
Anti-Feedback, Room Tuning, Gain, Effects
33
Parameter
Specification
Preset/Scene Memory
99 User Scenes,
143 Factory Presets
External Control
99 User Presets
TouchMix Control Apps
for iPad® and Android tablets controls most mixer functions.
for iOS® and Android smartphones controls personal monitor mix, rec/play, user buttons.
Requirements
iPad, iPhone (iOS 6 or later) / Android device (5.0 or later)
Third Party Control Surfaces
Wi-Fi
iCon Platform M+, Behringer XTouch Compact, PreSonus FaderPort 8
Requires:
External ethernet Wi-Fi router (recommended)
Sampling Frequency
THD
Frequency Response
Dynamic Range
Equivalent Input Noise
Residual Output Noise
Crosstalk
S/N Ratio
Gain
Maximum Input Level
USB Wi-Fi adapter (QSC Part# CP-000033-00)
Selectable 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
<0.005%, +4 dBu; 20 Hz-20 kHz, unity gain, any input to any output
20 Hz-20 kHz +/-0.5 dB, any input to any output
105 dB
-126 dBu
-86 dBu
-80 dB
-94 dB
Microphone inputs: 75 dB (60 dB analog, 15 dB digital)
+16 dB (XLR mic/line inputs),
+26 dB ( TRS mic/line inputs),
+24 dBu (TRS line inputs),
Maximum Output Level
Phantom Power
Line Voltage / Input Power Requirements
Dimensions (HWD)
0 dBv (top panel 1/8” stereo input)
+22 dBu (all line-level outputs)
48 v, all mic and talkback inputs, individually switchable per input
100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz
Shipping: 12 in X 23.7 in X 19.5 in. (30.5 cm X 60.3 cm X 49.5 cm)
Weight
Mixer only: 7.5 in X 16.9 in X 18.1 in. (19 cm X 42.9 cm X 46 cm) rack mountable with optional accessory
Shipping: 25.2 lb (11.4 kg)
Mixer: 17.5 lb (7.9 kg)
1001108-01-F
34
TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 Specifications
Display
Inputs (Mic/Line) 1
Input (Talkback)
Outputs 1
TouchMix-8
TouchMix-16
6.1” x 3.5” (156mm x 90mm) color TFT, touch sensing.
Total 12
Total 18
4 XLR / TRS combo (48V Phantom Pwr)
4 XLR / TRS combo (48V Phantom Pwr)
4 XLR (48V Phantom Pwr)
12 XLR (48V Phantom Pwr)
2 Stereo, TRS
N/A
Total 8
2 Stereo TRS
1 XLR
Total 12
2 Main, XLR, line-level
2 Main, XLR, line-level
4 Auxes, XLR, line-level
6 Auxes, XLR, line-level
1 Stereo TRS Cue/Mon
2 Stereo auxes, TRS
(Line or headphone, 16 Ω min. imp)
1 Stereo TRS, Aux 3/4
(Line / In-Ear Monitor, 16 Ω min. imp)
1 Stereo Mon, TRS
(Line / In-Ear Monitor, 16 Ω min. imp)
(Line or headphone, 16 Ω min. imp)
1 Stereo Cue, TRS
(Line or headphone, 16 Ω min. impedance)
Digital Connections
Input Channel Processing
2 USB type A connectors
4-band parametric EQ with Hi/Low shelving option
Variable 24db/octave Low-cut & High-cut filters
Compressor
Effects
Gate
4 Professional effects engines configurable as:
Reverb (2 types)
Pitch shift
Mono delay
Stereo delay
Chorus.
2‑Trk (USB) & FX Return Processing
Pitch Correct (One assignable to any mono input channel)
2-band shelving EQ
Variable 24db/octave Low-cut
Compressor
Output Channel Processing
Gate
Main L/R & Aux 1 - 4
Main L/R & Aux 1–6:
1/3 Octave Graphic EQ (GEQ)
1/3 octave graphic EQ (GEQ)
Notch Filters (8-bands)
Notch Filters (8-bands)
All outputs
All Outputs
6-band Parametric EQ (PEQ)
6-band parametric EQ (PEQ)
Variable 18dB/oct Low-cut and High-cut filters
Variable 18dB/oct Low-cut and High-cut filters
Limiter/Compressor
Limiter/Compressor
Recording/Playback 2
100 msec. Delay
USB Direct to Hard Drive multi-track (14 x 14)
100 msec. Delay
USB Direct to Hard Drive multi-track (22 x 22)
Stereo MP3 Playback from USB
8 DCA groups (with mutes)
Stereo MP3 Playback from USB
Groups
Cue
Real Time Analyzer
Scene and Preset Memory
8 Mute groups
Selectable AFL or PFL
1 x 1/3 octave
100 User Scenes
100 User Presets
100 FX presets
1001108-01-F
35
TouchMix-8
External Control 3
TouchMix-16
TouchMix Control Apps
for iPad® and Android tablets controls most mixer functions.
for iOS® and Android smartphones controls personal monitor mix, rec/play, user buttons.
Requirements
Wi-Fi 4
Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Line Voltage Requirements
Sampling Frequency
Internal Processing
Latency
THD
Frequency Response
Dynamic Range
Equivalent Input Noise
Residual Output Noise
Crosstalk
S/N Ratio
Maximum Input Level
Phantom Power
K & Lock® Security Slot 5
Included Accessories
1 All TRS connectors are 1/4 inch.
iPad, iPhone (iOS 6 or later) / Android device (5.0 or later)
USB Wi-Fi adapter included
56 mm x 333 mm x 245 mm (2.2” x 13.1” x 9.6”)
58 mm x 360 mm x 291 mm (2.3” x 14.2” x 11.5”)
4.3 lb (1.95 kg)
5.9 lb (2.98 kg)
100 - 240 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz
Selectable 44.1kHz or 48kHz
32-bit floating point
<1.6msec, any input to any output
<0.005%, +4 dBu, 20 Hz - 20 kHz, unity gain, any input to any output
20 Hz - 20 kHz +/-0.5 dB, any input to any output
105 dB
-126 dBu
-86 dBu
-80 dB
-94 dB
+16 dBu (Mic/Line inputs, XLR), +26 dBu (Mic/Line inputs, TRS), +22 dBu (Stereo inputs)
48V, individually switchable per channel
Compatible with the MicroSaver Security Cable
USB Wi-FI adapter, Soft Carrying Case, Power Supply
2
A list of drives that have been validated by QSC may be found at qsc.com. The hard-drive market is huge and continuously changing so there are many
drives QSC has not validated that will work. Always test a new drive before using it for a critical session. Minimum requirement is USB 3.0 HD, SSD or
7200 RPM, FAT32 format.
3
The TouchMix App requires iOS 7 or higher.
4
Use only the Wi-Fi adapter supplied with your mixer.
5
Available on early production models of TouchMix-16.
1001108-01-F
36
TouchMix™ Feature List
Alphabetical list of some of the main features on the TouchMix-30 Pro, TouchMix-8, and TouchMix-16.
Feature
Navigation
Info System Topic
2‑Track Playback
Home > Stereo In/2-Trk
Two Track Playback, 2‑Track Playback
2‑Track Record
Home > Stereo In/2-Trk Rec
Misc Features, 2‑Track Rec
Amplifier Settings
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > Setup
Output Channels, Setup
Anti-Feedback
Select an output > Anti-Feedback
Output Channels Filters / Anti-Feedback Topic
Auto Mixer
Menu > Auto Mixer
Misc Features, Auto Mixer
Aux Mix on Faders
Select an Aux on left of screen
Misc Features, Aux Mix
Aux Mix Overview
Aux
Output Channels, Aux Overview
Channel Compressor
Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Comp
Input Channels, Compressor
Channel Controls
Home > Select a bank > Select a channel
Home Screen, Channel Controls
Channel EQ
Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > EQ
Input Channels, EQ
Channel Gate
Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Gate
Input Channels, Gate
Channel Linking
Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Setup
Input Channels, Setup
Channel Overview
Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Overview
See "Overivew" topics
Channel Presets
Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Presets
Input Channels, Presets
Channel Safe
Menu > Channel Safe
Scenes / Safe
Copy & Paste
User Buttons U7 & U8
Misc. Features, Copy/Paste
Cue Mode
Menu > Mixer Setup
Misc. Features, Mixer Setup
Cue Monitor Delay
Monitor
Misc. Features, Mixer Setup
Monitor
Misc. Features, Mixer Setup
Rec/Play > Recording Mode > Multi-Track DAW
Misc. Features, DAW Interface
DCA Groups
Home > DCA Groups > Select a DCA
Misc. Features, DCA Groups
Digital Gain
Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Setup
Input Channels, Setup
Effects EQ
Home > Select FX Masters bank > Select an FX Channel > EQ
FX Masters, EQ
Effects Library
Home > Select FX Masters bank > Select an FX Channel > Presets
FX Masters, Presets
Effects Mix Overview
Menu > FX Overview
FX Masters
Effects Processors
Home > Select FX Masters bank > Select an FX Channel > Effect
FX Processors, sub-topics
Effects to Auxes
Home > Select FX Masters bank > Select an FX Channel > Auxes
FX Masters, Aux Sends
Effects to Auxes
Home > Select FX Masters bank > Select an FX Channel > Effect > FX Returns to
Monitors
FX Masters, Aux Sends
Effects to Auxes
Select an Aux on left of screen > Select FX Masters
FX Masters, Aux Sends
FX Wizard
Wizard > FX Wizard
Wizards, FX Wizard
Gain Wizard
Wizard > Gain Wizard
Wizards, Gain Wizard
Languages
Info > Languages OR Menu > Language
中文, Deutsch, English, Français, Русский Español
No Help Topic
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Cue Monitor Source
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
DAW
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
MIDI Control
Menu > MIDI
Misc. Features, MIDI Setup
MP3 Player
Rec/Play > Recording Mode > Stereo MP3
Two Track Playback, 2‑Track Playback
Multi-Track Record
Rec/Play > Recording Mode > Multi-Track USB
Misc. Features, Recording and Recording Setup
Mute Groups
Mute Groups
Misc. Features, Mute Groups
1001108-01-F
37
Feature
Navigation
Info System Topic
Network Setup
Menu > Network
Misc. Features, Network Setup
Noise
Menu > Talkback / Noise
Misc. Features, Talkback / Noise
Output Compressor/Limiter
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > Limiter
Output Channels, Limiter
Output Delay
Home > Select an Aux bank > Select an Aux > Setup
Output Channels, Setup / Delay
Output Delay
Home > Select an Output channel bank > Select a channel > Setup
Output Channels, Setup
Output Filters
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > Anti-Feedback
Output Channels, Filters
Output GEQ
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > GEQ
Output Channels, GEQ
Output PEQ
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > PEQ
Output Channels, PEQ
Output Presets
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > Presets
Output Channels, Presets
Patch Matrix
Menu > Patch Matrix
Misc. Features, Patch Matrix
Phantom Power
Mic. 48V
Misc. Features, Phantom
Pick-off point, dynamics
Menu > Mixer Setup
Misc. Features, Mixer Setup
Pitch Correct
Home > Select a bank > Select a channel > FX
Effects Processor, Pitch Correct
Polarity
Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > Setup
Input Channels, Setup
Remote Control Setup
Menu > Remote Control
Misc. Features, Remote Control
Reset mixer
Menu > Mixer Setup
Misc. Features, Mixer Setup
Room Tuning Wizard
Wizard > Tuning Wizard
Wizard, Room Tuning
RTA (Channel)
Home > Select a bank > Select a Channel > EQ > RTA On
Misc. Features, RTA
RTA (Selectable)
RTA
Misc. Features, RTA
Sample rate
Menu > Mixer Setup
Misc. Features, Mixer Setup
Scenes
Touch Scenes button (upper left corner of screen)
Misc. Features, Scenes
Security
Menu > Security
Security
Solo In Place
Menu > Mixer Setup
Misc. Features, Mixer Setup
Speaker Settings
Home > Select a bank > Select an Output > Setup
Output Channels, Setup
Sub Groups Compressor/
Limiter
Home > Select a Sub Group bank > Select a Sub Group > Limiter
Sub Group Channels, Limiter
Home > Select a Sub Group bank > Select a Sub Group > PEQ
Sub Group Channels, PEQ
Talkback
Menu > Talkback / Noise
Misc. Features, Talkback / Noise
User Buttons
Menu > User Buttons
Misc. Features, User Buttons
Wi-Fi
Menu > Network
Misc. Features, Network Setup
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Sub Groups PEQ
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
1001108-01-F
38
Nav Strip
Home
(if needed)
Home
NOTE: The examples shown are from
the TouchMix-30 Pro. TouchMix-8 and
TouchMix-16 will differ slightly.
The Nav Strip provides the primary means of navigating
between fader banks. In addition, it provides an overview
of all fader positions for the selected mix and any clipping
conditions.
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 9-16
Inputs 17-24
Stereo In/2-Trk
FX Masters
Aux Out 1-8
Aux Out 9-14
Sub Groups
DCA Groups
To access the Nav Strip – From any screen, press Home once or twice to display Home page.
Blue Nav Strip Bank – Indicates the currently selected bank. Touch the bank to select it.
Nav Strip Titles – Indicates the type and range of the channels.
Faders – The faders represent the current position of all the mixer’s faders for the currently selected mix (Main, Auxes 1 - 14).Fader levels are
not adjustable from the Nav Strip
Red Fader Slot – This is a “sticky” clipping indication the channel is, or has been clipping. Reduce the input channel trim, then go to Menu
> Mixer Setup > Clear Clip, or push the Clear Clip user button.
Inputs 1–8, 9–16, and 17–24 – Displays the fader settings for mic/line inputs.
Stereo In/2-Track – Displays the fader settings for line inputs and for 2-track playback and record.
FX Masters – Displays the level of the returns for the internal effects processors.
Aux Outputs 1–8, 9–14 – Displays the level of the auxiliary outputs.
Sub Groups 1–8 – Displays the level of the eight Sub Groups (TouchMix-30 Pro only).
DCA Groups – Displays the level of the eight DCA master faders. Refer to the DCA Group Assignments on page 108
1001108-01-F
39
Channel Controls
Input channels are shown on left. FX, Aux, and DCA channels may differ slightly. The
Main L/R Channel is visible on most screens.
17
Scene:
Deltas Scene II
1
1.
Select button – Displays the user-defined channel name. Touch to access
Master Channel controls.
2.
Cue
Cue
Cue
Cue
Channel Cue button – Routes the channel signal to the Phones and
Monitor outputs regardless of Mute status. Green indicates “on”.
Pan slider – Adjust by touch or Master Encoder. Stereo pans
3
are mirrored.
Mic
Mic
Mic
Main
4
11
1
2
3
L/R
Mic 1 – Represents physical XLR (1) and channel type (In, Aux, FX, etc.).
12
C – Indicates the Compressor is engaged. Input channels do not have a
5
13
Limiter.
18
G – Indicates Gate is engaged.
6
14
48 – Indicates the Phantom Power is on.
19
7
“0” (Unity) – 0 dB (Meter)
15
Meter (Input channel) – Indicates the pre-fader signal level regardless of
20
8
Mute setting. Can be controlled by source output level, Trim knob or Digital
Gain.
16
9
Mute – Silences the channel audio to the Main L/R, Auxiliaries and FX.
Does not mute the send to multi-track. Orange color indicates the channel is
muted by DCA or Mute Group.
Link – Indicates linked adjacent channels. Lower numbered, odd channel
links to higher numbered even channel.
10 Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Playback – Indicates that the input to this channel is a recorded track.
Recording Armed – Indicates this channel is armed for recording.
U (unity) – 0 dB (Fader)
Channel/Main Fader – Adjust by touch or Master Encoder. Yellow slot indicates selected.
Assignments – Indicates to which mixes the channel is assigned: Main (L/R) – all models, Sub Groups (1 – 8) – TouchMix-30 Pro
only.
Scene – Displays the name of the active Scene. Touch to access Scenes.
L – Indicates the Limiter is engaged
AF – Indicates the Anti-feedback Filter is engaged
L/R Meters – Indicate Main output signal level.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Joe
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
1001108-01-F
L
C
R
L
C
R
10
5
5
5
u
G
48
5
20
u
G
48
10
20
0
LR
40
10
5
L
C
10
LR
R
10
u
G
C
5
C
48
L
10
C
40
Main
In 3
2
0
10.
In 2
LR
40
5
10
10
20
0
40
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
5
6
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
7
8
u
AF
5
0
20
40
Input Channels
Input Channel − Overview
Select an
Input Bank
Home
Provides a single-screen view of frequently used
controls and indicators for the input channel.
Select
Overview
Tab
Select
Channel
Inputs 1-8
Overview
In 1
1.
Inputs 1-8
Overview tab – Selects the Channel
Overview screen.
1
Overview
EQ
Comp
Gate
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
2. Preset – Shows the currently selected Preset
3
4
5
6
2
7
for this channel. Touch the + to change the Preset.
In 1
Main
+
3. Polarity Reverse – Changes the polarity
8
9
10
of the signal.
12
24
EQ 11
AUX Sends 13
4. Digital Gain – Controls and indicates the
amount of digital gain (+/- 15 dB) that has been
14
applied to the signal.
1
L/R
5. Delay – Controls and indicates the amount of
delay (up to 100 msec.) applied to the signal.
15
1
2
3
4
6. Delay In – Applies / bypasses the delay.
16
18
17
7. Reset – Sets all controls for the input channel
21
19
20
22
to the factory default position.
Comp
Gate
FX Sends
23
8. L/R Subs – (TouchMix-30 Pro only) Indicates
the output assignments channel (L/R Main,
Sub Groups 1 – 8).
9. DCA – Indicates which DCA groups are
∞
assigned to the channel.
10. Mute Groups – Indicates which Mute
groups affect the channel.
11. Parametric EQ Graph – A graphic
representation of the equalization curve based on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate that the EQ is Out (disengaged).
• EQ Graph Vertical Scale – Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
• EQ Graph Horizontal Scale – Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
12. EQ In – Engages / disengages the equalizer for the input channel.
13. Aux Sends –
• Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux channels.
• Adjustable sliders send signal to the associated Aux channel output.
• Mute indicates if the channel’s send to an Aux is muted or not.
14. EQ Handles – Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button
must be engaged to see the EQ Handles. Pinching to change Q is supported on the TouchMix-30 and tablet apps for all models.
15. Low and High Cut Filter and Frequency Bands 1, 2, 3, and 4 – These buttons engage or disengage the
associated filter.
To adjust the following parameters, select the field then use the Master encoder or the up/down nudge buttons on a mobile device.
16. Gain, Bands 1, 2, 3, and 4 – Displays and adjusts gain (+/- 15 dB) of the frequency band.
17. Low and High Cut Filter Frequency – Displays and adjusts the knee frequency for the high and low cut filters.
18. Frequency Bands 1–4 frequency adjustment fields – Displays and adjusts the center frequency for the four
parametric EQ bands.
19. Comp –
• Comp – Engages or disengages the channel’s compressor.
• Threshold – Displays and sets the level at which compression begins.
• Attack – Displays and sets the time it takes for the compressor to reach its maximum compression when the threshold level
is exceeded.
• Release – Displays and sets the time it takes for the compressor to cease gain reduction when signal drops below threshold.
• Ratio – Displays and sets the amount of compression applied to the signal.
Scene:
Default
Main Mix
L/R
Next
Prev
Joe’s Ears
Aux 1
Preset
Polarity
Reverse
Ele Gtr Dyn
Digital Gain
Delay
-3.0
In
0.00
dB
Reset
ms
Aux 2
Aux 2
L/R Subs
L/R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DCA
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Mute Groups
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cue
Aux 3
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
20
20
10
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
1
Joe’s Aux
M
2
Aux 2
M
3
Aux 3
M
4
Aux 4
M
10
4
1
0
L
C
R
Mic
Main
0
2
-10
-10
-20
-20
20Hz
50
100
200
500
1K
2K
5K
Aux 7
Aux 8
120
Aux 8
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
80.0
400
2.0k
6.0k
5
5
5
Aux 7
10
10
10K 20K
M
Aux 5
L
L
u
G
6
Aux 6
M
7
Aux 7
M
8
Aux 8
9
Aux 9
M
10
Aux 10
M
11
Aux 11
M
8.0k
u
F
5
48
5
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
Threshold
Aux 10
Aux 10
-12.0
Attack
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
16.0
Release
Ratio
4.0
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
Gain
0.00
41
1
Mono Delay
-60.0
Attack
2
Lush Reverb
3
Dense Reverb
1.00
Release
50.0
Aux 13
Aux 14
Threshold
L
C
R
LR
250
4
Pitch Shift
5
Mono Delay
6
Lush Reverb
Attenuation
60.0
Hold
100
20
0
12
Aux 12
M
13
Aux 13
M
14
Aux 14
M
20
0
40
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mute
Mute
• Gain – Displays and sets the overall output gain to makeup any loss after the signal is compressed.
20. Gate –
To adjust the following parameters, select the field then use the Master encoder or the up/down nudge buttons on a mobile device.
•
Gate – Engages or disengages the Gate.
•
Threshold – Displays and sets the signal level at which the Gate allows audio to pass.
• Attack – Displays and sets how quickly the gate reacts to a signal that exceeds the threshold.
•
Release – Displays and sets how quickly the Gate attenuates the audio when signal falls below threshold.
• Attenuation – Displays and sets the amount of attenuation applied to the output when the signal is below the Threshold.
• Hold – Displays and sets the minimum time the Gate stays open once it is opened, and the length of time the Gate stays open after the
input level drops below the Threshold.
21. FX Sends –
•
Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the FX channels.
•
Adjustable sliders send signal from this channel to the associated FX processors.
22. Aux Channel Link icon – Indicates the two channels are linked.
23. Aux Pan control – When two channels are linked, the even number send slider becomes a pan control..
24. M – Indicates if the channel send to the Aux mix is muted.
1001108-01-F
42
Input Channel – Analog Trim
NOTE: Proper gain trim adjustment
prevents clipping, improves signal-to-noise
performance, and allows preset
compression and gate dynamics to
function as intended.
Select an
Input Bank
Home
The Trim (gain) control sets the level of the analog input
signal just before conversion to digital. The Trim controls
are not available on the remote devices. Only Mic/Line
Input Channels have Trim controls.
Trim
Trim
1
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Aux Out 1-8
Aux Out 9-14
Main Mix
L/R
2
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 9-16
Inputs 17-24
Stereo In/2-Trk
FX Masters
Sub Groups
Scene:
Default
DCA Groups
Joe’s Ears
Aux 1
NOTE: The mixer also has digital gain
trim. Its settings are stored and recalled
with scenes and presets. See “Input
Channel Setup” for more detail.
The following controls and indicators are used to set the
input gain Trim:
1.
2.
•
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Joe
In 3
In 4
In 5
In 6
In 7
In 8
Main
Aux 2
Cue
Aux 3
Cue
Cue
Cue
Cue
Cue
Cue
Cue
Cue
Aux 3
L
C
R
L
C
R
L
C
R
L
C
R
L
C
R
L
C
R
L
C
R
L
C
R
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Mic
Mic
Mic
Mic
Mic
Mic
Mic
Mic
Main
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L/R
Aux 6
10
10
10
5
5
5
7
Aux 6
Trim Controls – Located above the
touchscreen, adjusts sensitivity of mic/line inputs
(TouchMix-30 Pro shown).
Aux 7
Nav Strip – Touch to select a fader bank.
Aux 9
The red line in Inputs 1-8 fader bank is a clip
indication that is persistent (sticky). It is cleared
using the “Clear Clip” function (User Button 2) or
from the Menu screen. Clearing the indication
affects only the device (tablet or mixer) on which
it was cleared.
In 2
Aux 2
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
L
L
u
G
48
5
3
10
20
0
L
u
G
48
5
4
10
20
0
L
u
G
48
5
5
10
20
0
10
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
5
L
u
G
48
5
6
L
u
G
48
5
20
G
48
5
20
0
L
u
G
48
5
20
0
20
0
5
L
u
G
48
10
10
10
10
0
L
u
10
5
10
10
20
0
u
F
5
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
LR
LR
40
LR
40
LR
40
LR
40
LR
40
LR
40
LR
40
40
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
40
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Aux 14
Level Meter (Mic 1) – Indicating that the
signal level in the channel is below unity. If input
gain trim is properly adjusted, this will be seen when the source is playing somewhat below its average level
Level Meter (Mic 2) – Indicating that the signal level in the channel is slightly above unity. If input gain trim is properly adjusted,
this will be seen when the source is playing at its average level.
Level Meter (Mic 3) – Indicating that the signal level in the channel is above unity. If input gain trim is properly adjusted, this
will seen when the source is playing somewhat above its average level.
Level Meter – Indicating the channel is clipping. Reduce the source output level or mixer input gain and clear the clip indication (User
Button 2).
Input Channel Fader – Adjusts the output of the channel to the Main L/R outputs, post-fader aux. sends, and Sub-Groups
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
1001108-01-F
43
Input Channel − EQ
1.
EQ tab – Selects the EQ screen.
2.
3.
EQ In – Engages / disengages the equalizer.
RTA On – Engages the Real Time Analyzer
display.
NOTE: A maximum of two RTA
displays for TouchMix-30 Pro, and one RTA
display for the TouchMix-8 and -16 are
available at a time on any combination of a
mixer and tablet devices.
1
Main Mix
Joe’s Ears
Aux 1
EQ
In 1
L/R
2
16
Overview
EQ
PEQ
In
Comp
Gate
FX
Auxes
Presets
3
Out
Setup
5
4
RTA On
Simple
Reset
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
-5
6
-5
-15
-15
-30
-30
-45
-45
Scene:
Default
Next
Prev
Aux 2
In 1
Main
17
18
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
-60
-60
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1K
1.2
1.6
2K
2.5
3.1
4K
5K
6.3
8K
10K
7
20
Mic
Main
1
L/R
12.5 16K
10
10
20
5
5
Aux 7
10
Aux 8
10
4
1
Aux 7
8
0
L
L
u
G
0
3
Aux 8
u
F
5
48
5
10
-10
10
-10
Aux 9
Aux 9
4.
Touch the EQ
Tab
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 1-8
31.5
NOTE: When the RTA is off, the
Parametric EQ graph expands to use the
entire graph area.
Touch a
Channel
Selector
Touch an
Input Bank
Home
Controls and displays the settings for the Input Channel
equalization.
-20
-20
9
20Hz
10
50
100
200
500
1K
2K
9
10
5K
20K
10K
20
0
20
Simple button – Hides the Low Cut, High
1
2
3
4
11
Cut, Frequency, and BW controls. Does not effect
12
existing settings.
∞
Reset button – Sets all the EQ controls to
15
15
13
their factory default position.
14
RTA display – Displays the amplitude of the
channel signal in 1/3 octave bands. Peak hold is
displayed only on tablet devices.
Parametric EQ graph – A graphic representation of the equalization curve based on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate
that the EQ is Out (disengaged).
Aux 10
0
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Gain
Low Cut
Gain
0.00
5.
Aux 12
dB
Aux 12
Freq
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Hz
Aux 14
Q
Q
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
•
EQ Graph horizontal scale – Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
8.0K
6.0K
Q
EQ graph vertical scale – Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
LR
40
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Hz
Q
•
Freq
Freq
2.0K
Hz
Aux 14
High Cut
0.00
dB
Freq
400
Hz
Gain
0.00
dB
Freq
80.0
Hz
Aux 13
6.
Freq
120
Aux 13
Gain
0.00
dB
Hz
Mute
Mute
EQ Handles – Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button
must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
Low Cut and High Cut filter buttons – These filters cut frequencies below or above the frequency set by the
corresponding Freq control.
Low Shelf and High Shelf filter buttons – Changes EQ Band 1 and Band 4 from parametric filters to shelving filters.
When a shelf filter is engaged, the Bandwidth control is not available.
Frequency Bands 1, 2, 3, and 4 buttons – Engages / disengages the associated parametric EQ band. Each band is fully
parametric with a frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
Gain control knob and readout – Adjusts the gain at the frequency setting of the associated EQ band. Range of -15 dB to
+15 dB.
Freq control knob (Frequency bands 1 – 4) – Sets the center frequency of the associated EQ band. If the Shelving filter is
engaged, the Freq control sets the knee frequency of the shelf filter.
Q knob – Adjusts the bandwidth of the associated EQ band. When the Shelf Filter is selected, the Bandwidth control is hidden. In
addition, Q can be adjusted by “pinching” (TouchMix-30 Pro and tablet apps only).
Freq control knob (Low and High Cut) – Sets the frequency of the low and/or high cut filter as measured from a point 3 dB
below 0 or unity.
buttons – Navigates to the next or previous channel. The buttons cycle through the Input, playback, record, and FX channels,
then loops back to Input 1.
Channel controls – Output controls for selected channel. See Channel Controls topic.
Main Channel controls – Output controls for the Main L/R outputs. See Channel Controls topic.
1001108-01-F
44
Input Channel − Compressor
The Compressor controls the dynamic range of a signal
above a set Threshold.
1.
Comp tab – Selects the Compressor screen.
2.
Comp In / Out switch – Engages and
disengages the compressor.
Knee In button
– Determines
how abruptly
the compressor
Knee
transitions in and
Out
In
out of gain reduction
as the threshold
is crossed.
Simple button – Turns Simple mode on
and off. Hides all controls except:
3.
4.
•
Comp In
Touch an
Input Bank
Home
Touch
Comp
Tab
Touch
Channel
Inputs 1-8
In 1
Comp
Inputs 1-8
Main Mix
1
L/R
Overview
Joe’s Ears
Aux 1
Comp
Aux 2
Aux 2
In
EQ
Comp
Gate
FX
Auxes
3
2
Out
Presets
4
Knee In
In
6
G.R.
7
Out
Setup
Scene:
Default
5
Simple
In 1
Reset
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Cue
Threshold
10
L
-33.3 dB
2.1:1
9
11
C
C
B
D
Aux 7
Mic
Main
1
L/R
A
15
L
C
Aux 7
Reset
Aux 10
•
Compression
Aux 11
5
L
u
F
5
48
Aux 8
•
10
5
u
G
Aux 8
Aux 9
R
10
Aux 6
Simple
Cue
Ratio
Aux 6
•
Main
8
Aux 3
Aux 3
Next
Prev
5
10
E
10
Aux 9
Attack
Release
Gain
20
0
20
0
Aux 10
6.3 ms
Aux 11
12
175 ms
00.0 dB
13
14
LR
40
40
Reset button – Sets all the Comp controls
∞
to their factory default position.
18
16
17
19
6. In meter – RMS input level
Side Chain
De-Esser
7. G.R. meter – Gain Reduction – (red)
indicates how much the signal is being reduced
by the compressor.
8. Out meter – Output level after any applied compression
9. Threshold slider – Sets the point at which the compressor will begin to reduce signal level.
10. Compressor graph – Vertical scale from 0 dB to -60 dB; horizontal measurement is time. When the Compressor is engaged, the
trace is displayed.
5.
Aux 12
1
2
Aux 12
3
4
5
6
7
8
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
6.0
Aux 14
•
In
In 1
In
Mute
Mute
Threshold (A) – The level at which compression begins.
• Attack time (B to E) – The time it takes for the compression to reach its maximum compression after the input exceeds the threshold level.
•
Ratio (A to E) – The amount of compression applied to the signal.
• Release time (C to D) – The time it takes for the compressed signal to rise to the threshold level once the input level no longer exceeds the threshold.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Ratio slider – Sets the ratio of input level to output level when the signal exceeds the threshold.
Attack slider – Adjusts how quickly the compressor reacts to a signal that exceeds the threshold.
Release slider – Adjusts how quickly the compressor stops compressing when signal falls below threshold.
Gain knob – (Compressor only) Adjusts the overall output gain to makeup any loss after the signal is compressed.
Compressor indicator – When the Compressor is In, an orange “C” displays on the channel controls strip.
De-Esser knob – Adjusts the amount of compression at the frequencies of sibilant consonants such as “s”, “z”, and “sh”.
De-Esser button – Engages or disengages the De-Esser.
Side Chain selector – (TouchMix-30 Pro only) Selects another input channel to control the compression of the currently selected
channel. Touch the Side Chain selector box then use the Master Encoder to adjust.
19. Side Chain In – (TouchMix-30 Pro only) Engages or disengages the side chain. When the side chain is disengaged, the input of the
currently selected channel controls its own compression.
1001108-01-F
45
Input Channel − Gate
The Gate passes audio above a set Threshold, and
attenuates audio below the Threshold.
1.
Gate tab – Selects the Gate Screen.
2.
Gate In switch – Engages or disengages
the Gate.
Simple button – Turns Simple mode on
and off. Hides all controls except:
3.
•
Gate In button
•
Simple button
•
Reset button
•
Gating knob
4.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
•
Threshold (A)
•
Attack time (A-B)
•
Release time (C-D)
•
Attenuation Level (E).
Touch a
Channel
Select
Gate
Tab
Inputs 1-8
In 1
Inputs 1-8
Gate
1
3
2
5
6
4
7
9
8
10
A
Reset button – Sets all the Gate controls
to their factory default position.
In meter – RMS input level
G.R. meter – Gain Reduction – indicates
how much the signal is being reduced by the
Gate.
Out meter – Output level
Threshold slider – Sets the point at which
the Gate allows audio to pass.
Gate graph – When the Gate is engaged,
the trace turns green.
5.
6.
Touch an
Input Bank
Home
B
E
C
11
D
12
13
Attenuation slider – Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the output when the signal is below the Threshold.
Attack slider – Adjusts how quickly the gate reacts to a signal that exceeds the threshold.
Release slider – Adjusts how quickly the Gate attenuates the audio when signal falls below threshold.
Hold knob – Sets the minimum time the Gate stays open once it is opened, and the length of time the Gate stays open after the
input level drops below the Threshold.
1001108-01-F
46
Input Channel − FX Sends
Touch an
Input Bank
Home
Controls how much of the Input channel’s audio is sent to the
FX devices.
Touch a
Channel
Touch the
FX Tab
Input 1-8
1.
2.
FX
In 1
FX tab – Selects the FX Sends screen.
1
FX Overview button – Navigates to the FX
Overview
EQ
Comp
Gate
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Overview screen for a view of all 6 FX sends from all inputs.
3
2
4
In 1
Main
3. Simple button – Hides the Global FX
Parameters for simplified operation.
Pre/Post
FX Buses
Global FX Parameters
6
Fader
4. Reset button – Resets the FX sliders, Pre/
5 Chorus
FX 1
8
8
9
Post settings, and the Pitch Correct settings. This
7
button does not reset the settings for the FX processors
Dense Reverb
FX 2
including the Global FX Parameters on this screen.
1
L/R
Post
5. FX Buses – The thumbnail representation of
Lush Reverb
FX 3
the FX processor takes you to a screen where you can
select the processor for that FX send, and adjust the
parameters for the selected FX processor.
Mono Delay
FX 4
6. FX Label – The larger text identifies the FX bus number,
and does not change. The smaller text can be changed
None
FX 5
in the FX processor Setup screen.
7. FX Send sliders – Sets the level of audio
Basic Chorus
FX 6
sent from the channel to the FX mix; “-inf” is off. The
∞
digital read-out to the right of the slider indicates the
slider setting.
10
Pitch Correct
8. Global FX Parameters – Provides
control over the two most important parameters of the
selected FX device. The parameters will differ depending on the selected processor.
9. Pre/Post Fader button – Selects a pre-fader or post-fader (default) pick-off point for the FX send. Changing this setting will change the
pick-off for all inputs.
10. Pitch Correct – Refer to the Pitch Correct topic.
Inputs 1-8
Main Mix
Scene:
Default
L/R
Next
Prev
Joe’s Monitor
FX Overview
Aux 1
Simple
Reset
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Cue
Joe’s FX
Aux 3
-20
-40
-10
Hz
10
U
-11.5
Aux 4
Rate
Depth
2.3
0.63
Pre
L
C
Cue
R
Aux 4
FX 2
Aux 5
Mic
-20
-40
-10
Sec
10
U
Aux 5
Rev Time
-23.0
mSec
Main
Initial Delay
34.0
0.00
Aux 6
10
Aux 6
FX 3
Aux 7
-20
-40
-10
m
10
U
Size
-inf
Aux 7
5
mSec
Pre Delay
1.43
0.5
u
L
FX 4
-20
-40
-10
mSec
10
U
-inf
48
%
Delay
F
0.5
Param 1
Param 2
32
0.00
Rate
Depth
1.5
0.5
5
10
Regen
1.7
u
5
G
Aux 9
5
L
Pre
Aux 8
Aux 8
10
10
Pre
Aux 9
Aux 10
-20
-40
20
0
FX 5
Aux 10
-10
10
U
-inf
Aux 11
LR
FX 6
-20
-40
Aux 12
-10
Hz
10
U
-inf
Pre
Aux 13
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Aux 13
Aux 14
Enable
Key
E
Blend
Amount
20%
Dry
Aux 14
Wet
Correct
Rate
Slow
8.3
Mute
Fast
FX Signal Flow
Input audio passes through the EQ, and Dynamics (compressor and gate). At this point you can split the audio and send it to the FX system (Pre-fader), then the
Channel Fader. Or, send the audio through the Channel Fader then split it and send it to the FX system (Post-fader).
“Dry” audio (no FX processing) continues through the Pan control to the Main L/R Fader and Main outputs.
The Pre-fader or Post-fader audio is sent to the Channel FX sends (The diagram shows just one of the FX Sends).
The FX Send slider determines how much of the channel audio is sent (or routed) to the assigned FX processor.
The FX processor works its magic on the audio and transforms the mono input into a stereo signal. The FX Master fader controls how much or how little of the
processed (“wet”) signal is combined with the unprocessed (“dry”) audio before going to the Main L/R fader and on to the Main L/R outputs.
Audio
Input
Input
Channels
Channel
Fader
Channel
Pan
10
EQ
Dynamics
5
u
5
Main
L/R
10
L
C
R
20
Main
Left
10
40
5
u
Pre
5
Post
10
10
20
5
FX
Send
u
-40
-20
-10
-5
U
5
10
5
10
20
FX
NOTE: For detailed information, refer to the Block Diagram.
1001108-01-F
47
40
FX
Master
40
∞
Main
Right
20
Pre
Aux 11
Aux 12
0
Mute
40
∞
Input Channel − Aux Sends
Auxiliary outputs are used to create a mix for stage
monitors, in ear monitors, remote speakers or
video / broadcast. The auxes may be linked for stereo.
1.
2.
Touch an
Input Bank
Home
Touch
Auxes
Tab
Touch a
Channel
Inputs 1-8
Inputs 1-8
In 1
Auxes
Auxes tab – Selects the Aux Sends screen
1
Overview
EQ
Comp
Gate
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Aux Overview button – Navigates to
2
3
the Aux Overview which displays all Aux mixes on a
In 1
Main
Aux Sends
single screen.
4 1 5 Joe’s Aux
8
9
7
6
3. Reset button – Resets all Aux Sends
Aux 2
2
controls, for the selected input channel, to the
factory default.
3
Aux 3
4. Aux mix system number – Displays the
4
Aux 4
1
L/R
number of the associated Aux Output.
5
Aux 5
5. Aux mix friendly name / button –
6
Aux 6
Displays the user-defined Aux mix name. Touch to
7
Aux 7
navigate to the associated Aux output controls.
11
10
8
Aux 8
6. Aux send sliders – Sets the level of audio
9
Aux 9
sent from the channel to the Aux mix; -40 dB (-Inf)
is off.
10
Aux 10
7. Level – Provides a numeric display of the Aux
11
Aux 11
send level.
∞
12
Aux 12
8. Mute – Mutes the send from the channel to the
13
Aux 13
associated Aux mix. Does not effect any other mixes
14
Aux 14
or sends.
9. Pick-off point button – Indicates if the Aux Buss is
taking a Pre Fdr/ Post Fdr / Pre Dyn
/ Pre All signal. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output controls to change the setting. Affects all sends for the associated
aux mix.
10. Aux link indicator – Indicates the Aux channels are linked. You can link Aux channels from the Input channel Aux Sends screen
by touching one of the Aux mix buttons, or one of the pick-off buttons. Both take you to the Aux channel Setup screen where linking is
accomplished.
11. Aux Sends pan slider – Pans the signal between a linked pair of auxes.
Scene:
Default
Main Mix
L/R
Next
Prev
Joe’s Ears
Overview
Aux 1
Reset
Aux 2
Aux 2
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-3.0
Mute
Pre Fdr
-28.0
Mute
Post Fdr
-3.0
Mute
Pre Dyn
-12.0
Mute
Pre All
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 3
L
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
-40
-20
-10
U
Aux 6
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
R
Mic
10
Aux 5
C
Cue
Main
10
10
Aux 6
Aux 7
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Aux 7/8
L
L
u
G
-40
-20
-10
U
5
5
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
u
F
5
48
5
10
C
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Aux 10
Aux 10
20
0
20
0
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
-inf
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
-40
-20
-10
Aux 14
U
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
10
LR
40
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mute
Mute
Auxiliary Channels Flow Diagram
The Pre All, Pre Dyn, Pre Fader, and Post Fader buttons are radio-buttons that provide options for where the Aux Outputs get their signal. In the
figure below, the Pre Fader button is selected.
Channel
Fader
Audio
Input
Channel
Input
Channels
EQ
Dynamics
Pan
L
R
10
Aux
Sends
Pre Fader
-20
Pre Dyn
-10
-5
U
5
Post Fader
C
-40
Pre All
NOTE: For detailed information, refer to the Block Diagram.
1001108-01-F
48
Aux Outputs
Input Channel − Presets
2.
Touch an
Input Bank
Home
Recall presets from the factory library. Store and recall user
presets.
1. Presets tab – Selects Presets screen.
Touch the
Presets
Tab
Touch a
Channel
Inputs 1-8
In 1
Presets
Inputs 1-8
Current Preset – Displays the name of the
Overview
EQ
Comp
Gate
FX
current preset.
2
3. Preset Info (Factory only) – Touch to display details
about a preset. Information provided may include style of
4
music, instrument details, microphone/pick-up type and
5
6
position, or other helpful information.
Type
Instrument
Assorted
Acoustic Guitar
4. Factory / User switch – Toggles between
Bass
Banjo
Drums
Electric Guitar
Factory and User preset libraries.
Frets
Mandolin
• Factory Presets – A library of QSC designed inputResonator Guitar
Keyboards
Percussion
channel presets.
Strings
Vocals and Speach
• User Presets – User Presets may be stored to and recalled
Wind
from Internal memory or an External (USB) storage device.
5. Instrument list (Factory only) – Displays a list of
instrument categories. .
6. Type list (Factory only) – Displays a list of specific
instruments within the selected Instrument category.
7. Preset Name list (Factory only) – Displays a
8
list of professionally voiced, live-sound presets.
8. Recall button – Recalls the selected Preset.
9
10
Recall Options
Recalls all parameters for an Input Channel except:
Analog/Multi-track state, Track/Arm button, Cue, Mute,
Channel Link state
2
9. Omit Levels & Assignments switch – When engaged, channel, FX and aux levels as
well as mute, sub group and DCA assignments are not effected by preset recall.
10. Omit Name switch – When engaged, Channel Name is not effected when a preset is recalled.
11. Omit Phantom switch – When engaged, Phantom power setting is not effected when a preset is
recalled
NOTE: The following controls are available only when the Factory / User switch is set to User.
1
Main Mix
L/R
Auxes
Scene:
Default
Presets
3
Joe’s Ears
Aux 1
Current Preset
Ele Gtr Dyn Rock 1
Setup
Next
Prev
Preset Info
In 1
Main
Cue
Cue
Aux 2
Aux 2
Factory
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
User
7
Preset Name
Ele Gtr Dyn Blues
L
C
R
Ele Gtr Dyn Clean
Ele Gtr Dyn Metal
Mic
Main
Ele Gtr Dyn Rock 1
1
L/R
Ele Gtr Dyn Rock 2
Ele Gtr Dyn
10
10
5
5
Aux 7
L
L
Aux 7
u
G
Aux 8
u
F
5
48
5
Aux 8
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
LR
1
2
Aux 12
3
4
5
6
7
8
Recall
Aux 13
Aux 13
Omit Levels &
Assignments
Aux 14
Aux 14
Omit Phantom
Current Preset
18. Save button – Saves the preset to the location indicated by the Internal / External (USB) switch. In
addition, the Save button recalls the preset.
19. Cancel button – Cancels the Save operation
20. File name field – This field displays the currently recalled preset name. There are two options:
• Choose to keep the same name. If the name exists in the target location, confirmation is required to overwrite.
• Change the name partially or in whole. If the name does not exist in the selected location, the preset saves.
21. Storage Location switch – Select either Mixer or USB for the location in which the preset is to
be saved.
1001108-01-F
49
∞
11
Omit Name
12. Save / Save As Button – Displays the Save Preset As screen with options for naming
a preset and selecting internal or USB storage destination.
13. Mixer list – Displays a list of user-defined presets that are saved on the mixer.
14. External (USB) list – Displays a list of user-defined presets that are saved on a USB drive currently
connected to the mixer.
15. Copy to USB button – Copy the selected Internal preset to a USB drive connected to the mixer.
16. Copy to Mixer button – Copy the selected USB preset to the Internal Mixer storage.
17. Delete button – Select a preset and touch this button to delete the preset.
NOTE: When saving a preset using an external tablet device do not use unsupported characters in the
name. Supported characters are 0 to 9, A to Z, a to z, a period (.), hyphen (-), equal sign (=), exclamation
point (!), parenthesis, underscore (_), or plus sign (+).
40
40
Aux 12
Mute
Mute
12
Ele Gtr Dyn Rock 1
Save/Save As
4
Factory
13
17
Mixer
USB
Al’s Bass
Garage Guitar
Joe’s Vocal
Shaker
Cajon
Tamborine
Acoustic 12-string
Lap Cajon
Sandy - Keys
Sandy - Keys - updated
15
Copy To USB
8
Recall Options
User
14
16
Copy To Mixer
17
Recall
9
10
Omit Levels
Omit Name
11
Omit Phantom
User Preset Screen
Save Preset As:
20
Preset 2-3
Storage Location
21
Mixer
USB
19
18
Save
Cancel
Save Preset As Screen
Input Channel − Setup
Channel Setup is provided for all input channels. Line
input channels do not have Phantom power controls.
Touch an
Input Bank
Home
Touch the
Setup
Tab
Touch a
Channel
Inputs 1-8
1.
Setup – Selects the Setup screen
2.
Name – Displays the name of the channel.
Touch to display a keyboard and rename the
channel.
Link – Links adjacent channels. The odd
numbered channel settings are copied to
the even numbered channel. Pan settings
are mirrored. Only odd > even pairings are
supported – even > odd pairings are not.
Reset – Resets the controls for this channel
to factory defaults.
Playback and Recording
3.
4.
5.
When one of these buttons is engaged, the other is not
displayed. The example above is for illustration only.
•
Digital Input – (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Selects the channel’s analog or digital input as
the signal source. The digital source may be
from a USB recording session or from a DAW
(see Rec/Playback for more information). Green
= digital, gray = analog.
Setup
In 1
Inputs 1-8
Main Mix
L/R
Overview
Joe’s Ears
EQ
Comp
Gate
FX
2
Aux 1
Auxes
3
Banjo
12.
13.
14.
15.
Scene:
Default
Next
Prev
2
Reset
Banjo
Main
Aux 2
Digital Input
Aux 3
Aux 3
5
Recording
Track
Polarity
Mic Phantom
7
6
Arm
Normal
Reverse
Patch Matrix Channel
8
48V
Cue
Cue
In 1
L
Aux 4
C
R
Aux 4
Units
9
Aux 5
Aux 5
Delay
In
Aux 6
0.00
feet
0.00
ms
0.00
meters
10
Channel Safe
During Scene Recall
Recallable
Aux 6
Digital Gain
11
Mic
Main
1
L/R
1.00 dB
Safe
10
10
5
5
Aux 7
L
L
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
12
Assignments
u
G
Main L/R
u
F
5
48
5
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
13
Aux 10
Aux 10
Sub 1
Sub 2
Sub 3
Sub 4
Sub 5
Sub 6
Sub 7
Sub 8
Yellow
Sub 2
Sub 3
Sub 4
Sub 5
Sub 6
Sub 7
Sub 8
20
0
20
0
Aux 11
Aux 11
14
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
11.
Setup
4
Link
15
DCA 1
DCA 2
DCA 3
DCA 4
DCA 5
DCA 6
DCA 7
DCA 8
DCA 1
DCA 2
DCA 3
DRUMS
DCA 5
DCA 6
DCA 7
DCA 8
Mute 1
Mute 2
Mute 3
Mute 4
Mute 5
Mute 6
Mute 7
Mute 8
Band
Mute 2
Mute 3
Mute 4
Mute 5
Mute 6
Mute 7
Mute 8
• Recording (Arm) – When engaged, the
audio on this channel will be recorded on the
USB Drive. Available only when the External Recording & Playback Mode is set to Multitrack USB Drive.
9.
10.
1
Aux 2
Aux 14
6.
7.
8.
Presets
LR
40
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mute
∞
Mute
Polarity – Touch to change polarity of the channel output.
Mic Phantom – Turns 48V phantom power on/off for the channel (microphone inputs only).
Patch Matrix Channel – (TouchMix-30 Pro only) Displays the current setting for this channel in the Patch Matrix. If another
channel has been patched to this channel, the field would display the patched channel’s number.
Delay – Delays the input signal from 0.00 to 100 milliseconds. Touch the In button to activate the delay.
Channel Safe During Scene Recall – Setting this switch to Safe, protects the channel controls from being changed when
a Scene is recalled.
Digital Gain – Applies +/- 15 dB of digital gain to the channel signal independently of the channel’s analog gain trim. The setting of
this control is stored and recalled with a scene or preset. When Track is selected as the source, the control applies to the digital input.
Main L/R – Assigns the channel’s output to the Main Left / Right mix. The factory default is on – assigned to Main L/R.
Sub Groups – (1 through 8 – TouchMix-30 Pro only) – Assigns the output of the channel to one or more of the eight Sub Groups.
User-assigned names display on the buttons. See the Sub Groups topic.
DCA Group (1 through 8) – Assigns the channel to DCA Groups. User-assigned DCA Group names display on the buttons. See the
DCA Groups topic.
Mute Groups (1 through 8) – Assigns the channel to Mute Groups. User-assigned Mute Group names display on the buttons. See
the Mute Groups topic.
1001108-01-F
50
Output Channels
Output Channel – Overview
Select an
Output
Bank
Home
Provides a single-screen view of frequently used
controls and indicators for the output channel.
Select
Overview
Tab
Select
Channel
Aux Out 1-8
1.
Aux 1
Overview
Overview tab – Selects the Channel
Inputs 1-8
Overview screen.
1
Limiter
AntiOverview
PEQ
GEQ
Auxes
Presets
Setup
2. Preset – Shows the currently selected Preset
(Comp)
Feedback
for this channel.
5
2
3
4
6
E10 Monitor
Main
3. Pick-off point – (Auxes only) Determines
where the signal for the output channel is taken.
7
8
9
4. Delay – Controls and indicates the amount of
PEQ 10
AUX Sends
11
13
delay (up to 100 msec.) applied to the signal.
5. Delay In – Applies / bypasses the delay.
12
1
L/R
6. Reset – Sets all controls for the input channel
to the factory default position.
14
7. Description of the Current Preset
1
2
3
4
15
8. DCA – Indicates which DCA groups are
17
16
assigned to the channel.
18
Comp
9. Mute – Indicates which Mute groups control the
channel.
10. Parametric EQ Graph – A graphic
representation of the equalization curve based
∞
on the EQ settings. When the EQ is engaged, the
trace becomes brighter.
• EQ Graph Vertical Scale –
Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
• EQ Graph Horizontal Scale –
Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
11. EQ Out/In – Engages / disengages the equalizer for the channel.
12. EQ Handles – Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button
must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
13. Aux Sends – (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
• Aux sends 9 – 14 are available for Aux Outputs 1 – 8 only,
• Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux channels.
• Adjustable sliders send signal to the associated Aux channel output.
• Mute indicates if the channel’s send to an Aux is muted or not.
14. Low and High Cut Filter and Frequency Bands 1, 2, 3, and 4 – These buttons engage or disengage the
associated filter.
To adjust the following parameters, select the field then use the Master encoder or the up/down nudge buttons on a mobile device.
15. Gain, Bands 1, 2, 3, and 4 – Displays and adjusts gain (-15 to +15 dB) for the selected frequency band.
16. Low and High Cut Filter Frequency – Displays and adjusts the knee frequency for the high and low cut filters.
17. Frequency Bands 1–4 frequency adjustment fields – Displays and adjusts the center frequency for the four
parametric EQ bands.
NOTE: The following section can be a Compressor or Limiter depending on the Comp/Limit switch on the Comp/Limiter tab.
Scene:
Default
Main Mix
L/R
Next
Prev
Joe’s Ears
Aux 1
Preset
Pre Fdr Post Fdr Pre Dyn
E10 Monitor
Pre All
Delay
In
0.00
Reset
ms
Aux 2
Aux 2
DCA
Tuned for QSC E10 Monitor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Mute Groups
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Out
Cue
In
20
20
10
10
5
11
22
0
66
Aux
Main
0
3
44
Aux 6
Aux 6
-10
-10
10
10
-20
-20
20Hz
50
100
200
500
1K
2K
5K
10K 20K
Aux 7
L
C
Aux 7
Aux 8
120
Aux 8
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
80.0
400
2.0k
6.0k
5
5
u
AF
u
F
5
5
8.0k
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
Threshold
Aux 10
Aux 10
-12.0
20
0
GR
9
Aux 9
M
10
Aux 10
M
11
Aux 11
M
20
0
Attack
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
16.0
Release
LR
50.0
Ratio
12
Aux 12
M
13
Aux 13
M
14
Aux 14
M
40
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4.0
Aux 14
Aux 14
Mute
Mute
18. Comp –
• Comp – Engages or disengages the channel’s compressor.
• Threshold – Displays and sets the level at which compression begins.
• Attack – Displays and sets the rate at which the compressor reaches its maximum compression when the threshold level is exceeded.
• Release – Displays and sets the rate at which the compressor ceases gain reduction when signal drops below threshold.
• Ratio – Displays and sets the amount of compression applied to the signal.
1001108-01-F
51
Output Channel − GEQ
Controls and displays the settings for Main or Auxiliary
output graphic equalization.
1.
GEQ tab – Selects the GEQ screen.
2.
Touch an
Aux Bank
Home
Touch an
Aux Channel
Touch
GEQ Tab
Aux Outputs1-8
GEQ
Aux 1
Inputs 1-8
GEQ In/Out switch – Engages /
1
AntiLimiter
Overview
PEQ
GEQ
disengages the equalizer.
Feedback
(Comp)
3. Tuning In/Out switch – Engages /
4
3
2
GEQ
Tuning
disengages the settings established by the Room
Tuning Wizard. See the Room Tuning Wizard
7
topic for more information.
4. Tuning Wizard button – Starts the
tuning wizard for the selected channel.
5. RTA On – Turns the RTA (Real-time Analyzer)
on and off.
8
6. Reset – Sets all EQ controls to factory default
values.
7. RTA graph – Displays the amplitude of the
channel signal in 1/3 octave bands. Peak hold is
displayed only on tablet devices.
8. Graphic Equalizer – Displays the controls
for the 1/3 octave graphic equalizer. If the Tuning
switch is on, a second set of EQ fader caps (blue
outline) will be displayed to indicate the settings
established by the Room Tuning Wizard.
9. Prev / Next – Navigates to the next or
previous channel. The buttons cycle through the
Input, Playback, Record, and FX channels, then loops back to Input 1.
10. Channel controls – Controls for selected Output channel. See Channel Controls topic.
11. Main Channel controls – Controls for the Main L/R outputs. See Channel Controls topic.
Main Mix
Auxes
Out
In
Out
Tuning Wizard
In
Setup
RTA On
Aux 3
-5
Main
Joe’s Monitor
Reset
Aux 2
Aux 2
Next
Prev
6
5
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 1
Presets
Scene:
Default
9
L/R
10
11
Cue
Cue
-5
-15
-15
-30
-30
-45
-45
-60
-60
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
31.5
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1K
1.2
1.6
2K
2.5
3.1
4K
5K
6.3
8K
10K
L
C
R
Aux
Main
1
L/R
12.5 16K
Aux 6
10
10
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
5
5
L
C
u
AF
u
F
5
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
20
0
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
LR
40
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
∞
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
52
Mute
Mute
Output Channel − PEQ
Controls and displays the settings for the Main or
Auxiliary output parametric equalization.
1.
2.
3.
PEQ tab – Selects the PEQ screen.
PEQ In/Out switch – Engages /
disengages the equalizer.
RTA On button – Turns the RTA (Realtime Analyzer) on and off.
Touch an Aux
Bank
Home
Touch an
Aux Channel
Touch the
PEQ Tab
Aux Outputs1-8
1
Main Mix
L/R
Overview
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 1
PEQ
Aux 1
Inputs 1-8
2
PEQ
PEQ
16
AntiFeedback
GEQ
Comp
Auxes
Presets
Out
RTA On
In
5
4
Simple
Reset
NOTE: When the RTA is off, the
Parametric EQ graph expands to use the
entire graph area.
17
6
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Simple button – Hides the Low Cut, High
Cut, Frequency, and BW controls. Does not effect
existing settings.
Reset button – Sets all EQ controls to
factory default values.
RTA graph – Displays the amplitude of the
channel signal in 1/3 octave bands. Peak hold is
displayed only on tablet devices.
Parametric EQ graph – A graphic
representation of the equalization curve based
on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate
that the EQ is Out (disengaged).
18
Cue
Aux 3
Cue
Aux 3
L
Aux 4
C
R
Aux 4
Aux 5
4.
Main
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 2
Aux 2
Next
Prev
3
Scene:
Default
Setup
Aux 5
Aux
Main
1
L/R
7
Aux 6
Aux 6
10
10
1
Aux 7
L
C
8
Aux 7
5
5
3
5
u
F
u
F
5
Aux 8
2
Aux 8
5
4
6
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
9
20Hz
Aux 10
10
Aux 11
Aux 11
12
Low Cut
Aux 12
Aux 12
50
100
1
Aux 10
Gain
15 120
Aux 13
13
Freq
14
Aux 13
Hz
Aux 14
20
0
3.0k
Hz
High Cut
LR
0.00
dB
Freq
1.00k
Hz
Gain
0.00
dB
Freq
500
Hz
20K
10K
20
0
6
Gain
0.00
9
10
5K
5
dB
Freq
200
Hz
2K
4
Gain
0.00
dB
Freq
80.0
1K
11
Gain
0.00
dB
Hz
500
3
Gain
0.00
dB
Freq
200
2
15 Freq
Freq
8.0K
8.0k
40
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
∞
Hz
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
Hz
Mute
Mute
Aux 14
•
EQ Graph vertical scale –
Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
•
EQ Graph horizontal scale – Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
EQ Handles – Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button
must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
Low and High Cut Filter buttons – These filters cut frequencies below or above the frequency set by the corresponding
Freq control.
Low and High Shelf Filter buttons – Changes EQ Band 1 and Band 6 from parametric filters to shelving filters. When a
shelf filter is engaged, the Bandwidth control is not available.
Frequency Bands 1 - 6 In/Out buttons – Engages / disengages the associated parametric EQ band.
Gain knob – Adjusts and displays the gain at the frequency setting of the associated EQ band. Range of -15 dB to +15 dB.
Freq knob – Adjusts and displays the center frequency of the associated EQ band. The range is 20 Hz to 20 kHz for all bands. If the
Shelving filter is engaged, the Freq control sets the knee frequency of the shelf filter.
Q knob – Adjusts the bandwidth of the associated EQ band. When the Shelf Filter is selected, the Bandwidth control is hidden. Q may
also be adjusted by “pinching” (TouchMix-30 Pro and tablet apps only).
Freq knob (Low and High Cut) – Sets the knee frequency of the low and/or high cut filter as measured from a point 3 dB below 0 or
unity.
Prev / Next buttons – Navigates to the next or previous channel. The buttons cycle through the Input, Playback, Record, and FX
channels, then loops back to Input 1.
Channel controls – Output controls for selected channel. See Channel Controls topic.
Main Channel controls – Output controls for the Main L/R outputs. See Channel Controls topic.
1001108-01-F
53
Output Channel − Compressor / Limiter
When set as a Limiter, prevents the audio level from
exceeding a preset threshold.
1.
Comp / Limiter tab – Selects the Comp /
Limiter screen. Note that the label on this tab will change
depending on the setting of the Comp/Limiter switch.
2.
Comp / Limiter In/Out switch
– Engages or disengages the compressor or
limiter. Note that the label on this tab will change
depending on th setting of the Comp/Limiter
switch.
Comp/Limit switch – Selects
Compressor or Limiter mode. If “Comp” is
selected, the processor is identical in operation
to the input channel compressors.
Knee In button – The knee determines
whether the compressor/limiter transitions
abruptly or gradually as the threshold is crossed.
Simple button – Hides all controls except:
3.
4.
5.
•
Limiter In button
•
Simple button
•
Reset button
Home
Touch Aux Out
1–8 or 9–14
Touch an Aux
Channel
Touch the
Limiter Tab
6.
Reset button – Sets all the Limiter
controls to their factory default position.
7. In meter – RMS input signal level
8. GR meter – Gain Reduction – indicates how much the signal level has been reduced by the Limiter.
9. Out meter – Output signal level
10. Threshold slider – Sets the point at which the compressor/limiter will begin to reduce signal level.
11. Limiter graph – When the Limiter is engaged, the trace is blue.
•
Threshold (A) – The level at which limiting begins.
• Attack time (B to C) – The time it takes for the limiter to reach maximum limiting after the input exceeds the threshold level.
•
Ratio (A to E) – The amount of limiting applied to the signal.
• Release time (C to D) – The time it takes for the limited signal to rise to the threshold level once the input level no longer exceeds the
threshold.
•
Vertical scale = dB
12. Ratio slider – Sets the ratio of input level change to output level change when the signal exceeds the threshold.
13. Attack slider – Adjusts how quickly the processor reacts to a signal that exceeds the threshold.
14. Release slider – Adjusts how quickly the processor stops compressing or limiting when signal falls below the Threshold.
1001108-01-F
54
Output Channel − Anti-Feedback
Available on the Main L/R and Aux outputs, these
narrow, cut-only filters are used for dealing
with feedback.
1.
Anti-Feedback tab – Selects the AntiFeedback screen
Press AntiFeedback
Anti
Feedback
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Filters In/Out – Engages or bypasses the
filters.
Feedback Frequency – The AntiFeedback system automatically identifies and
displays suspected feedback frequencies.
Manual Kill – When a suspected feedback
frequency is identified, touching this button
applies a filter at that frequency.
Feedback Wizard – The Feedback
Wizard assists in finding and cutting feedbackprone frequencies. Touching this button opens
the Feedback Wizard which will guide the
operator through the process.
Reset – Sets all the Filter controls and markers
to their factory default position. Note that the
Feedback Wizard will only use a filter if its Cut has
been set to 0.0.
Display – Shows the frequency and depth
(cut) of applied filters.
•
Aux Outputs1-8
OR
15
1
Joe’s Ears
Aux 1
Filters
PEQ
GEQ
In
Feedback
Frequency
2
Out
Comp
Auxes
Presets
Setup
7
0
2
1
3
8
Manual Kill
Feedback Wizard
Main
Reset
15
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
16
12
0
Aux 3
Aux 3
Next
6
5
4
124 Hz
Prev
Aux 2
Aux 2
Scene:
Default
14
AntiFeedback
3
Touch
Anti-Feedback
Tab
AntiFeedback
Aux 1
Inputs 1-8
Overview
Touch an
Aux Channel
or Main
Touch an Aux
Bank
Home
Main Mix
L/R
2.
OR
-5
-5
10
10
-15
-15
Cue
Aux 4
Aux 4
Main
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
L/R
10
-20
-20
20
Aux 6
Aux 7
1
50
9
100
200
500
1K
2K
5K
10K
20K
5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Aux 7
L
u
AF
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
10
Freq
Freq
Freq
Freq
Freq
Freq
Freq
Freq
Freq
Freq
Freq
Freq
52.1
37.5
70.2
132
247
462
866
1.62k
3.0k
5.7k
10.7k
20.0k
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
10
20
0
Hz
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
11
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
-15.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
40
∞
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
Aux 13
Aux 13
%
Aux 14
Filter Depth
13
12
84
Filter Q
13.6
Mute
Aux 14
Vertical scale = dB
• Horizontal scale = frequency
8.
Filter markers – These markers are color-coded to correspond with their associated controls. Horizontal position indicates
frequency. The amount of cut is indicated by a descending vertical line. Twelve filters - TouchMix-30 Pro, eight filters - TouchMix-8 and
-16.
NOTE: Markers and their associated frequency controls are not tied to a specific frequency band. Marker 1 may attenuate a high
frequency, while Marker 12 may attenuate a low frequency.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Filter In/Out – The numbered buttons engage/disengage the filters.
Freq – Sets the center frequency of a filter.
Cut – Adjusts amount of Cut (or attenuation) for a filter. Range is from 0.00 dB to -20.0 dB.
Filter Depth % – Increases or reduces the depth (amount of cut) for all the filters.
Filter Q – Adjusts the width of the filter from a Q of 6 (0.05 octave) to a Q of 30 (0.24 octave).
/ Buttons – Navigates to the next or previous channel. The buttons cycle through the Input, Playback, Record, and FX channels,
then loops back to Input 1. If you start in the Auxes, the buttons cycle through the Auxiliary outputs and the Main L/R channels.
15. Channel Controls – Output controls for selected channel. See Channel Controls topic. There are no controls displayed because
there is no Aux Master channel selected, only the Main L/R mix is selected.
16. Main Channel Controls – Output controls for the Main L/R outputs. See Channel Controls topic.
1001108-01-F
55
Output Channel − Auxes
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Auxiliary outputs 1 through 8 may be mixed to Aux
Mixes (buses) 9 through 14. In addition, the Main L/R
and Sub Groups can send audio to all 14 Auxes.
1.
2.
Auxes tab – Selects the Aux Sends screen
Touch
Aux Out 1-8
Bank
Home
Touch
Output
Channel
Touch
Auxes
Tab
Aux Out 1-8
Aux 1
Inputs 1-8
Auxes
Main Mix
L/R
Overview
PEQ
AntiFeedback
GEQ
Limiter
(Comp)
1
Auxes
2
Joe’s Ears
Aux 1
Aux Sends
Presets
Aux Overview
Setup
3
Scene:
Default
Prev
Reset
Next
Aux 1
Main
Cue
Cue
Aux Overview – Navigates to the Aux
Overview which displays all Aux mixes for the
selected Fader Bank.
Reset – Resets all Aux Sends controls for the
selected input channel, to the factory default.
1
L/R
Aux send number –Displays the number
of the associated Aux Output.
Aux master name – Displays the Aux mix
name. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux
output controls.
5
6
7
4
9
8
Aux send sliders – Sets the level of audio
9
Aux 9
sent from the channel to the Aux output; -40 dB
10
Aux 10
(-Inf) is off.
11
Aux 11
Gain – Provides a numeric display of the Aux
12
Aux 12
send level.
13
Aux 13
Mute – Mutes the send from the channel to
14
Aux 14
the associated Aux mix. Does not effect any
other mixes.
Pick-off point – Indicates if the Aux Buss
is taking a Pre All / Pre Dyn/ Pre Fdr / Post All signal. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output controls to
change the setting.
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
3.
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux
Aux 5
4.
Main
Aux 5
Aux 6
10
10
Aux 6
5
5.
Aux 7
5
L
C
Aux 7/8
u
AF
F
u
5
Aux 8
Aux 8
5
10
10
Aux 9
6.
Aux 9
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Aux 10
Aux 10
20
0
0
20
Aux 11
7.
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
8.
Aux 13
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
Aux 13
Aux 14
9.
-40
56
40
Mute
Mute
40
∞
Output Channel − Presets
Save, recall and copy the settings associated with an
Aux, Sub Group or Main L/R output channel.
1.
2.
Presets tab – Selects the Presets screen.
Touch an Aux
Bank
Home
Touch
the Presets
Tab
Touch an
Aux Channel
Aux Outputs1-8
Aux 1
Presets
Inputs 1-8
Current Preset – Displays the name
1
of the current active preset for the selected
channel.
2
3
Aux 1
Main
Save/Save As – Displays a page with
15
16
options for naming a preset and selecting
internal or USB storage destination.
4
5
6
Factory presets list – Displays a list of
factory programmed presets. Voicings for QSC
7
passive loudspeakers are provided. Reset sets
1
L/R
all output channel’s parameters to their factory
default state. The Reset preset is at the bottom
of the list, scroll down to see.
Mixer presets list – Up to 100 Internal
Presets may be stored (saved) to and recalled
from the mixer’s internal memory.
USB presets list – Up to 100 External
8
10
8
9
Presets may be stored (saved) to and recalled
from an External (USB) storage device.
11 11
∞
Selected preset – When a preset is
selected, the preset’s background is highlighted
1313
1414
12 12
Recall Options
blue, and the list’s title is highlighted blue.
Delete button – Select a User Preset and
touch this button to delete the Preset.
Copy to USB button – Copy the selected Preset to a connected USB drive.
Copy to Mixer button – Copy the selected Preset to the Internal Mixer storage.
Recall button – Recalls stored output channel settings including EQ, limiter, filter, mute assignments, DCA assignments, link state.
Levels and tuning settings may be recalled or omitted (see 12 and 13 below).
Omit Levels & Assignments switch – When set to On, recalling the preset will not change any levels or assignments to
Mute, DCA or Sub groups.
Omit Tuning switch – When set to On, recalling the preset will not change the anti-feedback tuning settings.
Omit Phantom – When set to On, recalling the preset will not change the Phantom Power settings.
Channel controls – Output controls for selected channel. See Channel Controls topic.
Main Channel controls – Output controls for the Main L/R outputs. See Channel Controls topic.
Scene:
Default
3.
Cue
4.
L
C
Cue
R
Aux
Main
10
10
5
5
L
L
u
G
5.
u
F
5
48
5
10
10
20
0
6.
20
0
40
40
7.
Recall
Omit Levels &
Assignments
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
1001108-01-F
57
Omit Name
Omit Phantom
Mute
Mute
Output Channel − Setup / Delay
Touch Aux
Output Bank
Home
Various utility setup functions for Aux and Main output channels.
Touch an Aux
Channel
OR
Touch
Setup
Touch Main
Aux
AuxOutputs1-8
Outputs1-8
1.
Setup Tab – Selects the Setup screen
OR
Aux 1
4
Inputs 1-8
Inputs
1-8
Setup
Main
Setup
1
Channel Name – Displays the channel name.
AntiComp
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Overview
PEQ
GEQ
Feedback
Touch to display a keyboard and rename the output.
2
3
4
3. Link (Auxes only) – Links adjacent channels.
Main
Main
Aux 4
Odd numbered channel settings are copied to the
even numbered channel. Pan settings are mirrored.
6 QSC Amplifier and Speaker Settings
Only odd > even linking is supported.
4. Reset – Returns Setup parameters to factory default
Channel Safe
10 Connector Mode
8
values.
7
4
L/R
9
5. Aux Pick-Off (Auxes only)– Determines where
the aux signal is taken from the input channel signal flow.
The selections are: Pre Fdr (default)/ Post Fdr / Pre Dyn
/ Pre All.
5
6. QSC Amplifier and Speaker
Settings – Displays tools to assist in optimizing
Assignments
gain structure and other parameters for selected QSC
amplifiers and loudspeakers.
DCA 1
DCA 2
DCA 3
DCA 4
DCA 5
DCA 6
DCA 7
DCA 8
11
7. Delay In – Engages or disengages the Delay.
∞
8. Delay – Displays and controls the output delay.
Mute 1
Mute 2
Mute 3
Mute 4
Mute 5
Mute 6
Mute 7
Mute 8
12
Readouts are provided in milliseconds, feet, and meters.
Mute 1
Mute 2
Mute 3
Mute 4
Mute 5
Mute 6
Mute 7
Mute 8
9. Channel Safe During Scene Recall
– Setting this switch to Safe prevents channel settings
from being changed when a Scene is recalled.
10. Connector Mode – (TouchMix-16 only) Converts auxes 7/8 and 9/10 from stereo outputs with unbalanced TRS jack to mono, balanced outputs.
Default is Stereo Mode.
11. DCA Group Assignments – Select the DCA Groups this channel is to be part of. User-assigned names display on the buttons. See the DCA
Groups topic.
12. Mute Group Assignments – Select the Mute Groups this channel is to be part of. User-assigned names display on the buttons. See the Mute
Groups topic.
2.
Scene:
Default
Main Mix
L/R
Next
Prev
Joe’s Ears
Aux
Aux 1
Reset
Link
Aux 2
Aux 2
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 3
Amplifiers
E Series
K Series
K2 Series
KLA Series
Cue
KW Series
Aux 4
Units
Aux 4
13.5
Aux 5
feet
Aux
During Scene Recall
Aux 5
Aux 6
In
12.0
ms
4.1
meters
Stereo
Recallable
Main
Mono (Bal)
10
Aux 6
Aux 7
5
L
Aux 7
5
L
AF
u
AF
Aux Pick-Off
Aux 8
10
5
5
10
10
Aux 8
Pre Fader
Aux 9
Post Fader
Pre Dynamics
Pre All
Aux 9
0
Aux 10
0
20
Main L/R
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
40
DCA 1
DCA 2
DCA 3
DCA 4
DCA 5
DCA 6
DCA 7
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
58
40
DCA 8
Mute
∞
Output – Speaker Settings
Provides Gain setting recommendations for QSC
powered loudspeakers. Also provides a list of available
loudspeaker presets for various applications on both
powered and passive loudspeakers. Note that these
presets are not available for all QSC loudspeakers.
1.
Select Speaker – Touch to select the QSC
loudspeaker connected to the output.
2.
Preset – Select a preset for the connected
loudspeaker.
a. If you are using a powered loudspeaker make
sure the DSP is set to the default preset.
4.
Touch
K Series
Aux Out 1 - 8
Aux 1
Inputs 1-8
K Series
Select QSC Speaker Model and Preset Name to display Gain Settings or Recall a Preset
2
Model
3
Preset Name
K8.2
Dance
K10.2
Floor Monitor
K12.2
K10.2
0dB
Live Bright
Live
b. If you are using an E Series (passive)
loudspeaker make sure that any DSP in the
amplifier is set to the default preset. The QSC
GXD amplifier has a setting for TouchMix
mixers. Refer to the GXD topic.
3.
Touch an
Output
Channel
Touch an
Output Bank
Press Home
1
Studio
Vocal Monitor
OFF
+10dB
GAIN
Set the Gain – Adjust the Gain knob on
your powered loudspeaker to the position
Rotate Gain knob 5 detents (clicks) past zero.
Done
Recall Preset
indicated by the illustration and the text below it.
When finished, touch the Done button.
NOTE: Subwoofer level may be adjusted to get the desired relative high/low balance.
When the speakers are adjusted as directed, signal to noise ratio is optimized and the output meters on the mixer reflect how much speaker
system headroom is available. Note that the LIMIT LED on the speakers is not a Clip indicator. It will be lit before the mixer’s meters indicate
any overdrive. This is because the speakers’ DSP is preventing dynamic peaks in the program from overdriving the amplifier and speakers.
GXD Amp Settings
Provides help in properly adjusting QSC GXD Amplifier when used with
the TouchMix.
Touch an
Output
Channel
Touch an
Output Bank
Press Home
Aux Out 1 - 8
On the GXD Amplifier
Inputs 1-8
1.
Home – If the amplifier’s Gain screen is not displayed, press the Home
button. If the Gain screen is displayed, skip to the next step.
2.
Adjust the Gain A and Gain B knobs for 0.0 dB gain. Enter – Moves to
the next screen.
Adjust the Gain B/DSP Control knob to select Stereo DSP. Enter –
Moves to the next screen.
Adjust the Gain B/DSP Control knob to select Sensitivity. Enter – Moves
to the next screen.
Adjust the Gain B/DSP Control knob to select TouchMix.
Enter – Confirms selection.
Home – Returns to the Home screen.
3.
4.
5.
6.
On the TouchMix
1.
Done – Closes the GXD Amp Settings pop-up.
Aux 1
Amplifiers
QSC GXD Amplifier Settings
Navigate to “Home”
HOME
HOME
Gain A
0.0 dB
Gain B
0.0 dB
ENTER
Gain B
STEREO DSP
ENTER
Gain B
SENSITIVITY
ENTER
Gain B
TOUCHMIX
ENTER
HOME
Done
1001108-01-F
59
Touch
Amplifiers
Aux Overview
Provides an overview of all the Aux mixes.
The Aux Send and Output levels may be adjusted on
screen or, for greater precision, by touching turning
the Master Control or using the
buttons on your
tablet device.
(TouchMix-30 Pro only) When the Aux Overview is
displayed, the Nav Strip display “grays out” the Aux
Out 9-14 and DCA Groups miniature fader banks. This
is because neither of these banks contains a signal
that’s available on any auxiliary mix. See the Aux Mix
on Faders topic for more information on Auxiliary and
Matrix mixes.
Press Aux
Aux
Main Mix
L/R
Inputs 1-8
1
Inputs 9-16
Inputs 17-24
Stereo In/2-Trk
1
FX Masters
1
Aux Out 1-8
Aux Out 9-14
Sub Groups
1
1
DCA Groups
Scene:
Default
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5/6
1.
2.
Input, FX Master and Sub Group
banks are selectable on the Nav Strip.
Each column (In 1, In 2) represents a channel,
and displays the channel’s Aux Sends and pan
controls.
Aux 7
2
Aux 7
3
6
4
7
5
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
NOTE: If an input has been given a
name, the name will be displayed as the
column heading. Touch the Select (name)
button to navigate to the input
channel’s controls.
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Each row represents an Aux mix, the name
of the mix is displayed in the first column and with the Master fader.
Stereo Aux Master Slider – A single slider is provided for a stereo linked Aux pair.
Pan Control Slider – Pans the input between the left and right sides of a stereo aux mix.
Pre Fdr/ Post Fdr / Pre Dyn / Pre All – Indicates the Aux Pick-off point that was set on the Aux Channel Setup tab.
Aux Master Fader – Adjusts the overall level of an Aux mix.
NOTE:
1001108-01-F
User defined names display in the left column.
60
Sub Groups (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Sub Group − Overview
Press
Home
Provides a single-screen view of frequently used
controls and indicators for the Sub Groups.
1.
Touch Sub
Group Bank
Touch a Sub
Group
Touch
Overview Tab
Overview tab – Selects the Sub Group
Overview
Sub 1
Inputs 1-8
Overview screen.
1
2. Preset – Shows the currently selected Preset
Overview
EQ
Comp
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
for this sub group. Cannot be changed from this
2
3
Sub 1
Main
screen.
4
3. Reset – Sets all controls for the sub group to
the factory default position.
6
7
EQ 5
AUX Sends
4. L/R Subs – Indicates whether or not the sub
group is assigned to the Main output.
8
5. Parametric EQ Graph – A graphic
1
L/R
representation of the equalization curve based
on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
that the EQ is Out (disengaged).
10
• EQ Graph Vertical Scale –
11
11
12
Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
Comp
FX Sends
14
• EQ Graph Horizontal Scale –
13
Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
6. EQ In – Engages / disengages the equalizer
15
for the sub group.
7. Aux Sends –
• Displays the system numbers and user-defined
names for the Aux channels.
• Adjustable sliders send signal to the associated
Aux channel output.
• Mute indicates if the channel’s send to an Aux is muted or not.
8. EQ Handles – Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button
must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
9. Low and High Cut Filter and Frequency Bands 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 – These buttons engage or disengage the
associated filter.
To adjust the following parameters, select the field then use the Master encoder or the up/down nudge buttons on a mobile device.
10. Gain, Bands 1–6 – Displays and adjusts gain (+/- 15 dB) of the frequency band.
11. Low and High Cut Filter Frequency – Displays and adjusts the knee frequency for the high and low cut filters.
12. Frequency Bands 1–6 frequency adjustment fields – Displays and adjusts the center frequency for the four
parametric EQ bands.
13. Comp –
• Comp – Engages or disengages the channel’s dynamics processor.
• Threshold – Displays and sets the level at which compression/limiting begins.
• Attack – Displays and sets the time it takes for the compressor/limiter to reach its maximum compression when the threshold level is
exceeded.
• Release – Displays and sets the time it takes for the compressor/limiter to cease gain reduction when signal drops below threshold.
• Ratio – Displays and sets the amount of compression applied to the signal.
• Gain – Displays and sets the overall output gain to makeup any loss after the signal is compressed.
• G.R. – Gain reduction meter shows the amount of compression applied to the signal.
14. FX Sends –
• Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the FX channels.
• Adjustable sliders send signal from this channel to the associated FX processors.
15. Aux Number & Name – Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux mixes.
Sub Groups
Scene:
Default
Main Mix
L/R
Next
Prev
Joe’s Ears
Aux 1
Preset
Ele Gtr Dyn Rock 1
Reset
Aux 2
Aux 2
L/R Subs
L/R
Cue
Aux 3
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
20
20
10
Aux 5
Aux 5
2
0
66
3
Aux 6
Joe’s Aux
M
2
Aux 2
M
3
Aux 3
M
4
Aux 4
M
L
C
R
Sub
Main
0
44
Aux 6
1
10
5
1
1
-10
-10
-20
-20
20Hz
50
100
200
500
1K
2K
5K
Aux 7
5
5
Aux 7
0.00
Aux 8
120
Aux 8
80.0
0.00
200
0.00
0.00
500
1.0k
0.00
3.0k
M
Aux 5
6
Aux 6
M
7
Aux 7
M
8
Aux 8
9
Aux 9
M
10
Aux 10
M
11
Aux 11
M
12
Aux 12
M
13
Aux 13
M
14
Aux 14
M
8.0k
10
5
L
L
u
G
0.00
8.0k
10
10K 20K
F
u
5
48
5
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
Threshold
Aux 10
Aux 10
-12.0
Attack
Aux 11
1
Mono Delay
2
Lush Reverb
3
Dense Reverb
16.0
Aux 11
Release
Aux 12
L
C
R
20
0
G.R.
LR
0
40
50.0
Aux 12
4
Pitch Shift
Ratio
Aux 13
4.0
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
5
Mono Delay
6
Lush Reverb
Gain
0.00
61
Mute
Mute
20
40
∞
Sub Group − PEQ
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Press
Home
Controls and displays the settings for the Sub Group
parametric equalization.
1.
EQ tab – Selects the PEQ screen.
2.
PEQ In/Out switch – Engages /
disengages the equalizer.
Touch a Sub
Group Bank
Touch a
Sub Group
Touch the
EQ Tab
Sub Groups
EQ
Sub 1
Inputs 1-8
1
Main Mix
L/R
16
Overview
EQ
Comp
FX
Auxes
Presets
Aux 1
2
PEQ
3
Out
RTA On
In
5
4
Simple
Sub 1
Reset
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
4.
5.
6.
7.
RTA On button – Turns the RTA (Realtime Analyzer) on and off.
Simple button – Hides the Low Cut, High
Cut, Frequency, and BW controls. Does not effect
existing settings.
Reset button – Sets all EQ controls to
factory default values.
RTA graph – Displays the amplitude of the
channel signal in 1/3 octave bands. Peak hold is
displayed only on tablet devices.
Parametric EQ graph – A graphic
representation of the equalization curve based
on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate
that the EQ is Out (disengaged).
18
-5
-15
-15
-30
-30
-45
-45
Cue
L
C
Cue
R
Aux 4
Aux 5
3.
6
-5
Main
17
Aux 2
NOTE: When the RTA is off, the
Parametric EQ graph expands to use the
entire graph area.
Next
Prev
Joe’s Ears
Scene:
Default
Setup
-60
Sub
Main
1
L/R
31.5
7
Aux 6
Aux 6
10
10
5
5
Aux 7
C
Aux 7
1
2
8
3
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
6
L
u
F
u
AF
5
0
5
4
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
9
20Hz
Aux 10
10
Aux 10
10
1
2
11
3
4
5
9
20
0
20
0
6
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
12
Low Cut
Gain
0.00
15 120
Aux 13
13
Gain
0.00
dB
Gain
0.00
dB
15
Freq
Freq
Freq
Freq
Freq
200
500
1.00k
3.0k
8.0k
Hz
Hz
Hz
Freq
LR
8.0K
40
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
∞
Hz
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
Aux 14
High Cut
0.00
dB
80.0
Hz
14
Hz
Aux 14
Gain
0.00
dB
Freq
Hz
Aux 13
Gain
0.00
dB
dB
Freq
Gain
Hz
Mute
Mute
• EQ graph vertical scale – Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
•
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
EQ graph horizontal scale – Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
EQ Handles – Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button
must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
Low and High Cut Filter buttons – These filters cut frequencies below or above the frequency set by the corresponding
Freq control.
Low and High Shelf Filter buttons – Changes EQ Band 1 and Band 6 from parametric filters to shelving filters. When a
shelf filter is engaged, the Bandwidth control is not available.
Frequency Bands 1 - 6 In/Out – Engages / disengages the associated parametric EQ band.
Gain knob – Adjusts and displays the gain at the frequency setting of the associated EQ band. Range of -15 dB to +15 dB.
Freq knob – Adjusts and displays the center frequency of the associated EQ band. The range is 20 Hz to 20 kHz for all bands. If the
Shelving filter is engaged, the Freq control sets the knee frequency of the shelf filter.
Q knob – Adjusts the bandwidth of the associated EQ band. When the Shelf Filter is selected, the Bandwidth control is hidden. In
addition to the Q knob, you can use a two-finger pinch / zoom to control the Q.
Freq knob (Low and High Cut) – Sets the knee frequency of the low and/or high cut filter as measured from a point 3 dB below 0 or
unity.
buttons – Navigates to the next or previous sub group. The buttons cycle through the Input, Playback, Record, and FX
channels, then loops back to Input 1.
Sub Group controls – Output controls for selected Sub Group.
Main Channel controls – Output controls for the Main L/R outputs. See Channel Controls topic.
1001108-01-F
62
Sub Group − Compressor / Limiter
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
The Compressor reduces the dynamic range of a signal
above a set Threshold. When set as a Limiter, prevents
the audio level from exceeding a pre-set threshold.
NOTE: Compressor and Limiter have
similar controls. Some of the labels and
the color of the trace will differ.
Overview
Joe’s Ears
Comp tab – Selects the Compressor screen.
2.
Comp In / Out – Engages and disengages
the compressor.
Comp / Limiter – Changes the function of
this screen between the Compressor and the
Limiter.
Knee In – The
knee determines
whether the
compressor/limiter
Knee
transitions abruptly
or gradually as the
Out
In
threshold is crossed.
Simple – Turns Simple mode on and off.
Hides all controls except:
3.
4.
5.
•
Comp (Limiter) In
•
Comp / Limiter
•
Simple
•
Reset
•
Compression (Limiting)
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Comp
Aux 2
1
In
EQ
2
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Comp
FX
3
Out
In
Comp
7
Aux 3
Aux 3
Touch the
Comp Tab
Comp
Main Mix
Aux 4
1.
Sub 1
L/R
Aux 2
Touch a
Channel
Sub Groups
Inputs 1-8
Aux 1
Touch an
Input Bank
Home
Threshold
G.R.
Auxes
Presets
5
4
Knee In
Limiter
8
Out
Setup
Scene:
Default
Simple
Next
Prev
6
Reset
Sub 1
Main
Cue
Cue
9
11
Ratio
L
-33.3 dB
2.1:1
10
12
Aux 6
B
Aux 6
C
Aux 7
D
C
Sub
Main
1
L/R
10
10
16
A
R
5
5
C
L
Aux 7
u
u
F
5
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
E
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
Attack
Aux 10
20
0
Release
20
0
Gain
Aux 10
6.3 ms
Aux 11
13
Aux 11
175 ms
14
15
00.0 dB
LR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Aux 13
40
40
Aux 12
Aux 12
∞
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
Mute
Reset – Sets all the Comp controls to their factory default position.
In meter – RMS input level
G.R. meter – Gain Reduction – (red) indicates how much the signal is being reduced by the compressor.
Out meter – Output level after any applied compression
Threshold – Sets the point at which the compressor will begin to reduce signal level.
Compressor graph – Vertical scale from 0 dB to -60 dB; horizontal measurement is time. When the Compressor is engaged, the
trace is displayed.
•
Threshold (A) – The level at which compression begins.
• Attack time (B to C) – The time it takes for the compression to reach maximum compression after the input exceeds the threshold
level.
•
Ratio (A to E) – The amount of compression applied to the signal.
• Release time (C to D) – The time it takes for the compressed signal to rise to the threshold level once the input level no longer
exceeds the threshold.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Ratio – Sets the ratio of input level change to output level change when the signal exceeds the threshold.
Attack – Adjusts how quickly the compressor reacts to a signal that exceeds the threshold.
Release – Adjusts how quickly the compressor stops compressing when signal falls below threshold.
Gain – (Compressor only) Adjusts the overall output gain to makeup any loss after the signal is compressed.
Compressor indicator – When the Compressor is In, an orange “C” displays on the channel controls strip. The Limiter displays a blue “L”.
1001108-01-F
63
Sub Groups − FX Sends
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Controls how much of the Sub Group audio is sent to
the FX devices.
1.
2.
Touch Sub
Groups
Bank
Home
Touch
Channel
Touch
FX Tab
Sub Groups
FX
Sub 1
Inputs 1-8
1
FX tab – Selects the FX Sends screen.
Overview
EQ
Comp
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
FX Overview button – Navigates to the
3
2
4
FX Overview screen for a view of all 6 FX sends from
Sub 1
Main
all inputs.
Pre/Post
FX Buses
Global FX Parameters
6
Fader
Simple – Hides the Global FX Parameters for
5 Chorus
FX 1
8
8
9
a simpler setup.
7
Reset – Resets the FX sliders, Pre/Post
Dense Reverb
FX 2
settings, and the Pitch Correct settings. This
1
L/R
Post
button does not reset the settings for the FX
Lush Reverb
FX 3
processors including the Global FX Parameters
on this screen.
Mono Delay
FX Buses – The icon indicates what
FX 4
processor has been selected for an FX mix.
Touch the icon to navigate to the processor.
None
FX 5
FX Label – The larger text identifies the FX bus
1 – 6, and does not change. The smaller text can
Basic Chorus
FX 6
be changed in the FX processor Setup screen.
∞
∞
FX Send sliders – Sets the level of audio “sent”
from the channel to the FX mix; “-inf” is off. The
digital read-out to the right of the slider indicates
the slider setting.
Global FX Parameters – Provides
control over the two most important parameters of the selected FX device. The controls are different depending on the selected
processor.
Pre/Post fader – Selects a pre-fader or post-fader (default) pick-off point for the FX send. Changing this setting will change the pickoff for all inputs.
Main Mix
Scene:
Default
L/R
Next
Prev
Joe’s Monitor
FX Overview
Aux 1
Simple
Reset
Aux 2
3.
Aux 2
Aux 3
4.
Cue
Joe’s FX
Aux 3
-20
-40
-10
Hz
10
U
-11.5
Aux 4
Rate
Depth
2.3
0.63
Pre
L
C
R
Aux 4
FX 2
Aux 5
Sub
-20
-40
-10
Sec
10
U
Aux 5
-23.0
Rev Time
mSec
Main
Initial Delay
34.0
0.00
Aux 6
10
10
Aux 6
FX 3
Aux 7
-20
-40
-10
m
10
U
-inf
Aux 7
5.
Cue
Size
5
5
mSec
CL
Pre Delay
1.43
0.5
L
Pre
u
u
F
5
Aux 8
5
FX 4
Aux 8
-20
-40
Aux 9
-10
mSec
10
U
-inf
Delay
48
%
10
10
Regen
1.7
0.5
Pre
Param 1
Param 2
32
0.00
Aux 9
6.
Aux 10
-20
-40
-10
10
U
-inf
Aux 11
LR
FX 6
Aux 12
-40
Aux 12
-20
-10
Hz
10
U
-inf
Rate
Depth
1.5
0.5
20
0
Pre
Aux 11
7.
20
0
FX 5
Aux 10
Pre
Aux 13
40
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Aux 13
Aux 14
Key
8.
9.
1001108-01-F
E
Blend
Amount
Dry
Aux 14
64
20%
Wet
Correct
Rate
Slow
8.3
Fast
Mute
Mute
Sub Group − Auxes
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Sub Groups may be sent to Auxiliary Mixes. An Aux may
be used to output a single Sub Group or as a matrix to
mix multiple Sub Groups.
1.
Auxes tab – Selects the Aux Sends screen
Touch the
Sub Groups
Bank
Home
Touch a
Sub Group
Channel
Touch the
Auxes
Tab
Sub Groups
Sub 1
Auxes
Inputs 1-8
Main Mix
L/R
Overview
Limiter
(Comp)
EQ
1
FX
Auxes
Presets
2
Joe’s Ears
Setup
Scene:
Default
Next
Prev
3
Main
Sub 1
Aux Sends
Aux Overview – Navigates to the Aux
4 1 5 Joe’s Aux
8
9
Overview which displays all Aux mixes on a
7
6
single screen.
Aux 2
2
3. Reset – Resets all Aux Sends controls, for the
3
Aux 3
selected input channel, to the factory default.
4
Aux 4
1
L/R
4. Aux send system number – Displays
5
Aux 5
the number of the associated Aux Output.
6
Aux 6
5. Aux Mix name – Displays the Aux mix
7
Aux 7
name. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux
11
10
output controls.
8
Aux 8
6. Aux send sliders – Sets the level of audio
9
Aux 9
sent from the channel to the Aux output; -40 dB
10
Aux 10
(-Inf) is off.
11
Aux 11
7. Gain readout – Provides a numeric display
∞
12
Aux 12
of the Aux send level.
13
Aux 13
8. Mute button – Mutes the send from the
channel to the associated Aux mix. Does not
14
Aux 14
effect any other mixes.
9. Pick-off point – Indicates if the Aux Buss is
taking a Pre Fdr/ Post Fdr / Pre Dyn / Pre All signal. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output setup screen to
change the setting.
10. Aux link indicator – Indicates the Aux channels are linked. Aux channels may be linked or unlinked from an Aux Output Setup
screen.
11. Aux sends pan-slider – Pans the signal between a linked pair of auxes.
2.
Aux Overview
Aux 1
Reset
Aux 2
Aux 2
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-3.0
Mute
Pre Fdr
-28.0
Mute
Post Fdr
-3.0
Mute
Pre Dyn
-12.0
Mute
Pre All
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 3
L
Aux 4
-40
-20
-10
U
-40
-20
-10
U
Sub
10
Aux 5
Aux 6
R
10
Aux 4
Aux 5
C
Cue
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
Main
10
10
Aux 6
Aux 7
5
5
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
L
L
u
u
Aux 7/8
-40
-20
-10
U
AF
10
-inf
Mute
5
Pre Fdr
5
10
C
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Aux 10
Aux 10
20
0
20
0
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
65
L/R
Mute
40
40
Mute
Sub Group − Presets
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Press Home
Recall presets for the selected Sub Group channel.
1.
Presets tab – Selects the Presets screen.
Touch Sub
Groups
Touch a
Sub Group
Channel
Sub Groups
Inputs 1-8
Sub 1
Presets
2.
Current Preset – Displays the name of
1
the currently active preset (if any).
2
3
3. Save / Save As button – Displays
a page with options for naming a scene and
selecting internal or USB storage destination.
4
5
6
4. Factory list – Displays a list of the factory
programmed presets available for the sub group.
5. Mixer (internal) list – Displays a list
of presets that have been stored to Internal
mixer memory.
6. USB (external) list – Displays a list of
presets that have been saved on an External
(USB) drive.
7. Delete button – Deletes a selected preset
from Internal or External user memory.
7
8
9
8. Copy to USB button – Copies the
selected preset to an external USB Drive.
10
9. Copy to Mixer button – Copies the
selected preset to the internal mixer memory.
11
10. Recall button – Recalls the selected
preset.
11. Omit Levels switch – When Omit Levels is On, recalling a preset will not affect any Sub Group levels.
1001108-01-F
66
7
Touch
Presets
Sub Group − Setup
(TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Rename the Sub Channel, assign Input channels to the
group, and assign/unassign the group to the Main L/R.
1.
Setup tab – Selects the Sub Group Setup
screen.
2.
Name – Touch the Name to display a
keyboard that may be used to enter a name for
the channel.
Link – Touch the Link button to link the
channel with the adjacent channel. Always links
odd to even.
Reset – Returns settings to the factory
default.
No/Yes – Select “Yes” to automatically
unassign an input channel from the Main L/R
when it is assigned to the Sub Group.
Input Channel numbering, both system (1) and
user assigned (In 1).
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press Menu
Touch FX
Masters
Touch an
FX Channel
Sub Groups
Inputs 1-8
Sub 1
Setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7.
L/R assigned L/R – Indicates the Sub
Group is assigned to the Main L/R outputs.
8.
9
L/R unassigned L/R – Indicates the
Sub Group is not assigned to the Main L/R
outputs.
Main L/R assignment button – Assigns and unassigns this Sub Group to the Main L/R outputs.
9.
1001108-01-F
67
Touch
Setup
2‑Trk Playback
2- Track playback controls a digital, stereo audio input signal. Depending on the Recording Mode selected, this signal may be from a USB multitrack session, a DAW (TouchMix-30 Pro only) or from MP3 files stored on the root directory of a USB drive.
2‑Trk Playback − Overview
Provides a single-screen view of frequently used
controls and indicators for the MP3 Audio Player
and the 2‑Track PB channel. The settings made here
affect both MP3 and 2‑Track audio.
1.
Touch
Recording
Mode
Press Rec/
Play
Touch Stereo
MP3
Touch
Overview
OR
Press Rec/
Play
Touch
Recording
Mode
Touch
Multitrack
USB Drive
Touch
OR Multitrack
DAW
Touch
Stereo
In / 2–Trk
Touch
2-Trk PB
Touch
Overview
Overview tab – Selects the Channel
Overview screen.
Recording
Stereo MP3
Rec/
Overview
Play
Mode
2. Preset – Shows the currently selected
Preset for this channel. Touch + to change the
OR
Preset.
Stereo In/2-Trk
Recording
Multitrack
Multitrack
Rec/
OR
2-Trk PB
OR
Overview
Play
3. Reset button – Sets all controls for
Mode
the playback channel to the factory default
1
position.
Overview
EQ
Effect
Auxes
Presets
Setup
4. Assigned To – Indicates the output
2
3
assignment channel L/R Main or not. Change
2-Trk PB
Main
in Setup.
4
5. Parametric EQ graph – A graphic
6
5
8
representation of the equalization curve based
on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate
7
that the EQ is Out (disengaged).
9
PB
L/R
• EQ Graph vertical scale
– Represents audio level from -20 dB
10
to +20 dB.
12
• EQ Graph horizontal scale –
13
11
14
15
Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
6. Out/In – Engages / disengages the
equalizer for the MP3 and 2‑Track PB channel.
7. EQ Handles – Touch, hold, and drag
to change the Frequency and Gain of the
∞
associated EQ band. The frequency band
button must be engaged to see the EQ
Handles.
8. Mute – Indicates the Mute groups to which
this channel is assigned.
9. Aux Sends –
• Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux channels.
• Adjustable sliders send signal to the associated Aux channel output.
• Mute indicates if the channel’s send to an Aux is muted or not.
10. Low Cut Filter and Shelf Filters 1 and 2 buttons – These buttons engage or disengage the associated filter.
USB Drive Playback
USB Drive
DAW
Main Mix
Scene:
L/R
Next
Prev
Default
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Cue
Aux 3
Cue
Aux 3
L
Aux 4
Aux 4
1
C
R
2
Playback
Aux 5
Main
Aux 5
Aux 6
10
10
Aux 6
5
Aux 7
5
L
Aux 7
L
Aux 8
G
Aux 8
48
u
AF
u
5
5
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
0
20
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
40
40
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Mute
Aux 14
NOTE: To adjust the following parameters, select the field then use the Master encoder or the up/down nudge buttons on a
mobile device.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Frequency, Low-Cut Filter – Displays and adjusts the knee frequency for the low cut filter.
Gain, Shelf Filters 1 and 2 – Displays and adjusts gain (+/- 15 dB) of the shelf filter.
Frequency, Shelf Filters 1and 2 – Displays and adjusts the frequency for both shelf filters.
Aux number & name – Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux mixes.
M – Indicates if the FX channel send to the Aux mix is muted. You can change this in the FX Masters Auxes tab.
1001108-01-F
68
∞
2-Trk PB – EQ
2-Trk PB (2‑track playback) provides equalization for
2‑Track audio from a previous TouchMix session or MP3
files stored on a USB device.
1.
EQ tab – Displays the Audio Player EQ
controls.
2.
PEQ switch – Enables (In) / bypasses (Out)
the equalizer.
RTA On – Enables / disables the Real Time
Analyzer.
3.
Touch Stereo
MP3
Touch
EQ
OR
Press Rec/
Play
Touch
Recording
Mode
Touch
Multitrack
USB Drive
Recording
Mode
Rec/
Play
Touch
OR Multitrack
DAW
Stereo MP3
Touch
Stereo
In / 2–Trk
Touch
2-Trk PB
EQ
USB Drive Playback
Recording
Mode
Main Mix
L/R
Overview
1
Multitrack
USB Drive
EQ
Stereo In/2-Trk
Multitrack
OR
OR
2-Trk PB
DAW
Auxes
Presets
Setup
4
3
Aux 1
Aux 2
EQ
Scene:
Audio
Player
2
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 2
5.
Reset button – Sets all the EQ controls to
their factory default position.
RTA Display – Displays the amplitude of the
channel signal in 1/3 octave bands.
2-Trk PB
Cue
Cue
L
C
R
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Playback
Main
PB
L/R
10
10
6
Aux 7
1
7
5
5
2
L
Aux 7
L
Aux 8
G
Aux 8
48
u
u
AF
5
5
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
20
0
8
20
0
9
Aux 11
Aux 11
10
Aux 12
10
EQ graph – A graphic representation of the
11
11
EQ settings.
7. EQ Handles – Touch, hold, and drag
to change the Frequency and Gain of the
associated EQ band. The frequency band button must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
8. Low Cut filter button – This filter cuts frequencies below the frequency set by the corresponding Freq control.
9. Bands 1 & 2 button – Engages / disables the low and high shelf filters.
10. Gain knob – Adjusts the gain of the associated shelf filter over a range of -15 dB to +15 dB.
11. Frequency knob – Sets the center, or shelving, frequency of the associated EQ band.
40
40
∞
∞
11
Aux 12
6.
Main
5
Aux 4
Aux 10
NOTE: Peak hold is displayed only on
tablet devices.
Default
Aux 3
Aux 6
4.
Next
Prev
Aux 3
NOTE: When the RTA is off, the
Parametric EQ graph expands to use the
entire graph area.
Touch
EQ
OR
Rec/
Play
NOTE: A maximum of two RTA
displays for TouchMix-30 Pro, and one RTA
display for the TouchMix-8 and -16 are
available at a time on any combination of a
mixer and tablet devices.
Touch
Recording
Mode
Press Rec/
Play
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
69
Mute
Mute
2-Trk Playback – Audio Player
Plays MP3 audio files from a USB memory device.
NOTE: Make sure the Sample Rate set
in the Mixer Setup matches the sample
rate of the MP3 file.
Rec/
Play
Recording
Mode
1.
Audio Player tab – touch to display Audio
Player controls.
2.
MP3 Songs – Displays a list of MP3 titles
on the inserted USB drive.
MP3 – Displays title of currently selected MP3
file.
Top-of-List – Touch to move to the beginning of
the file list.
Previous file – Touch to move to the previous file
in the file list.
Play – Touch to begin playback of the currently
selected MP3 file.
Next file – Touch to move to the next file in the
file list.
Stop Play – Touch to stop playback of the
currently selected MP3 file.
Playback Time – Indicates elapsed time since
beginning playback.
Recording Mode – Touch to change from
MP3 Playback mode to either Multitrack USB
Drive or Multitrack DAW.
00:00:00 – Represents the start of the file.
Progress Line indicates the approximate playback position in the file.
HH:MM:SS – Indicates the length of the file.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
1001108-01-F
Touch
Recording
Mode
Press Rec/
Play
70
Stereo MP3
USB Drive Playback
Audio
Player
Touch Stereo
MP3
Touch Audio
Player
2-Trk Playback − Auxes
Auxiliary outputs are used to create a mix for stage
monitors, in ear monitors, remote speakers or
video / broadcast.
1.
Auxes tab – Selects the Aux Sends screen
2.
Touch
Recording
Mode
Press Rec/
Play
Touch Stereo
MP3
Touch
Auxes
OR
Press Rec/
Play
Touch
Recording
Mode
Touch
Multitrack
USB Drive
Touch
OR Multitrack
DAW
Aux Overview button – Navigates to
the Aux Overview which displays all Aux mixes
Recording
Stereo MP3
Rec/
on a single screen.
Play
Mode
3. Reset button – Resets all Aux Sends
OR
controls, for the selected input channel, to the
factory default.
Recording
Multitrack
Rec/
OR
OR
Play
Mode
4. Aux send system number – Displays
the number of the associated Aux Output.
Audio
Overview
EQ
Player
5. Aux master name – Displays the Aux mix
name. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux
Aux Sends
output controls.
41 5
6
Joe’s Aux
6. Aux send sliders – Sets the level of audio
Aux 2
2
sent from the channel to the Aux output; -40 dB
(-Inf) is off.
3
Aux 3
7. Gain – Provides a numeric display of the Aux
4
Aux 4
send level.
5
Aux 5
8. Mute – Mutes the send from the channel
6
Aux 6
to the assiciated Aux mix. Does not effect any
7
Aux 7
other mixes.
11
10
8
Aux 8
9. Pick-off point – Indicates if the Aux Buss
is taking a Pre Fdr/ Post Fdr / Pre
9
Aux 9
Dyn / Pre All signal. Touch to navigate
10
Aux 10
to the associated Aux output controls to change
11
Aux 11
the setting.
12
Aux 12
10. Aux link indicator – Indicates the Aux
13
channels are linked. You can link Aux channels
Aux 13
from an Input channel Aux Sends screen by
14
Aux 14
touching one of the Aux Master buttons, or one
of the pick-off buttons. Both take you to the Aux
channel Setup screen where linking is accomplished.
11. Aux sends pan slider – Pans the signal between a linked pair of auxes.
Touch
Stereo
In / 2–Trk
Stereo In/2-Trk
Multitrack
USB Drive
2-Trk PB
DAW
Main Mix
1
L/R
Presets
2
Aux 2
-10
U
10
7
-3.0
Setup
3
Aux Overview
Aux 1
-20
Auxes
Scene:
Default
Auxes
Joe’s Ears
-40
Reset
-20
-10
U
2-Trk PB
Main
Cue
Cue
8 Mute 9 Pre Fdr
10
Aux 3
Aux 4
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Next
Prev
Aux 3
-40
Touch
Auxes
Auxes
USB Drive Playback
Aux 2
Touch
2-Trk PB
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-28.0
Mute
Post Fdr
-3.0
Mute
Pre Dyn
-12.0
Mute
Pre All
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Playback
Main
PB
L/R
10
10
Aux 6
Aux 7
-inf
Mute
L
Pre Fdr
u
Aux 7/8
-40
-20
-10
U
5
5
10
-inf
Mute
u
F
5
Pre Fdr
5
10
C
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Aux 10
Aux 10
20
0
20
0
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
-40
-20
-10
U
10
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
71
LR
40
40
∞
Mute
Mute
2-Trk Playback − Presets
Recall presets for the MP3 Stereo and the 2‑Trk
Playback.
1.
Touch
Recording
Mode
Press Rec/
Play
Touch Stereo
MP3
Touch
Presets
OR
Presets tab – Selects the Presets screen.
Current Preset – Displays the name of Press Rec/
Play
the currently active preset (if any).
3. Save / Save As button – Displays
Rec/
Play
a page with options for naming a scene and
selecting internal or USB storage destination.
4. Factory list – Displays a list of the factory
Rec/
programmed presets available for the currently
Play
loaded FX device. Touch a preset name to
select.
5. Mixer (internal) list – Displays a list
of presets that have been stored to mixer’s
internal memory.
6. USB (external) list – Displays a list of
presets that have been saved on an external
(USB) drive.
7. Delete button – Deletes a selected
preset from the mixer or USB user memory.
8. Copy to USB button – Copies the
selected preset to an external USB Drive.
9. Copy to Mixer button – Copies the
selected preset to the internal mixer memory.
10. Recall button – Recalls the playback
parameters of the selected preset. Recall
affects Aux Sends, EQ, Mutes, and Group
assignments.
11. Omit Levels – When on, the Aux and
2-Trk PB fader levels are not affected by the
preset Recall. EQ levels are affected by the
Recall in either position.
2.
Touch
Recording
Mode
Touch
Multitrack
USB Drive
Recording
Mode
Stereo MP3
Recording
Mode
Multitrack
Touch
OR Multitrack
DAW
Stereo In/2-Trk
Multitrack
OR
DAW
Joe’s Monitor
Touch
Presets
2-Trk PB
Presets
1
Main Mix
L/R
Touch
2-Trk PB
Presets
USB Drive Playback
USB Drive
Touch
Stereo
In / 2–Trk
Overview
EQ
Effect
Auxes
Scene:
Presets
Setup
3
2
Next
Prev
Default
2-Trk PB
Aux 1
Main
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
6
5
4
Cue
Cue
Aux 3
L
Aux 4
C
R
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Playback
Main
PB
L/R
Aux 6
10
10
Aux 6
5
5
Aux 7
L
Aux 7
L
Aux 8
G
Aux 8
48
u
u
AF
5
5
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 10
7
Aux 11
8
9
20
0
7
Aux 11
40
40
Aux 12
10
Aux 12
∞
∞
Aux 13
Aux 13
11
Aux 14
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
72
Mute
Mute
2-Trk Playback − Setup
Rename the 2-Trk PB channel, set Channel Safe, and
assign the channel to Mute and DCA Groups
Setup tab – Selects the Setup screen.
2.
Rec/
Name field – Touch the Name to display a Press
Play
keyboard that may be used to enter a name for
the channel.
Rec/
Reset button – Returns settings to the
Play
factory default.
Channel Safe During Scene Recall
– Setting this switch to Safe prevents channel
Rec/
Play
settings from being changed when a Scene is
recalled.
Main L/R button – Turns the FX channel’s
assignment to the Main Left / Right output on
and off.
DCA Group Assignment Buttons
– Select the DCA Groups this channel is to be
part of. See the DCA Groups topic.
Mute Group Assignment Buttons
– Select the Mute Groups this channel is to be
part of. See the Mute Groups topic.
4.
Touch Stereo
MP3
Touch
Recording
Mode
Touch
Multitrack
USB Drive
Recording
Mode
Stereo MP3
Recording
Mode
Multitrack
Touch
OR Multitrack
DAW
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
Touch
2-Trk PB
Touch
Setup
Setup
USB Drive Playback
USB Drive
Touch
Stereo
In / 2–Trk
OR
Multitrack
Stereo In/2-Trk
2-Trk PB
DAW
Setup
1
Main Mix
5.
Touch
Setup
OR
1.
3.
Touch
Recording
Mode
Press Rec/
Play
Overview
EQ
Effect
Auxes
Presets
3
2
Aux 1
Scene:
Setup
Next
Prev
Default
2-Trk PB
Main
Aux 2
6.
Aux 2
Cue
Aux 3
Cue
Aux 3
L
Aux 4
7.
C
R
Aux 4
4
Aux 5
Channel Safe
During Scene Recall
Aux 5
Aux 6
Recallable
Playback
Main
PB
L/R
10
10
Safe
Aux 6
5
5
Aux 7
L
Aux 7
5
Aux 8
u
L
5
G
5
48
Aux 8
u
AF
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
6
40
40
Aux 12
∞
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
7
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
73
Mute
2-Trk / Multitrack Playback
Multitrack mode plays back audio recorded on the
USB drive. Multitrack DAW mode (TouchMix-30 Pro
only) plays back tracks from a Core Audio compliant
computer.
Press
Home
Touch Stereo
In / 2-Trk
Stereo In/2-Trk
Inputs 1-8
Press Rec/
Play
Rec/
Play
Recording
Mode
Touch
Recording
Mode
Multitrack
USB Drive
Touch
Multitrack
USB Drive
OR
OR
Touch
Multitrack
DAW
Multitrack
DAW
2-Track Playback plays files that have been
recordedfrom the 2-Trk Record channel. If recording
isstopped and resumed, a new .wav file is createdThe
files in a session / directory are concatenated
forseamless playback.
1.
Stereo In/2-Trk bank – touch to display
2-Trk PB channel and controls.
2.
2-Trk PB select button – Touch to
access details of the channel.
USB Session – Displays title of active
session.
Start of session button – Touch to move to the
beginning of the session.
Rewind button – Touch to move quickly through
the file towards the beginning of the session.
Play button – Touch to begin playback of the
currently selected USB Session. Playback starts
at the location of the Progress marker (16).
Fast Forward button – Touch to move quickly
through the file towards the end of the session.
Stop button – Touch to stop playback of the current session.
Record button – Touch to begin recording in the current session. Records all armed channels.
Playback Time Display – Indicates elapsed time since beginning playback.
Recording Mode – Touch to change from the MP3 Playback mode to either Multitrack USB Drive or Multitrack DAW (DAW
available on TouchMix-30 Pro only).
Set button – Touch to set the current spot, in the session, of the Loc (location) marker.
Go To button – Touch to move the Progress Marker to the spot indicated by the Loc marker.
00:00:00 – Represents the start of the file.
Loc marker – Touch and drag the Loc (location) marker to a spot in the file you want, then touch the Set button to set the location.
Progress marker – Indicates the current playback position in the current session. Touch and drag to a spot in the file you want.
HH:MM:SS – Indicates the length of the session.
Recording Setup – displays the controls for 2-Trk Recording. Refer to the topic.FX Masters
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
1001108-01-F
74
FX Masters
FX Master − Overview
Provides a single-screen view of frequently used
controls and indicators for the FX channel.
1.
Overview tab – Selects the Channel
Overview screen.
2.
Preset – Shows the currently selected Preset
for this channel. Touch the + to change.
Effect – Shows the currently selected Effect
type for this channel. Touch the + to change.
Pre Fader / Post Fader button
– Selects the Aux mix pick-off point for the
effect. Selections are: Pre Fader – before the FX
master fader, or Post Fader – after the FX master
fader.
Reset button – Sets all controls for the FX
channel to the factory default position.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Assigned To – Indicates the output
assignments channel (L/R Main, Sub Groups
1 - 8).
DCA – Indicates the DCA groups to which this
channel is assigned.
Mute – Indicates the Mute groups to which
this channel is assigned.
Parametric EQ graph – A graphic
representation of the equalization curve based
on the EQ settings. The trace dims to indicate
that the EQ is Out (disengaged).
7.
8.
9.
Touch the
FX Masters
Bank
Home
Touch an
FX Channel
Touch the
Overview Tab
FX Masters
Main Mix
Overview
FX 1
Inputs 1-8
1
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
Scene:
Overview
EQ
Effect
2
Auxes
3
Presets
4
Setup
Default
5
FX 1
Aux 1
Aux 2
7
6
Aux 2
Aux 3
11
Cue
18
L
Aux 4
Aux 4
1
Main
8
10
9
Aux 3
Next
Prev
C
Cue
R
12
Aux 5
Aux 5
FX
Main
1
L/R
2
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
13
14
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
10
10
17
15
16
5
5
L
u
L
u
F
5
G
5
48
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
40
40
Aux 12
∞
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Mute
Aux 14
•
EQ Graph vertical scale – Represents audio level from -20 dB to +20 dB.
•
EQ Graph horizontal scale – Represents frequency from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
10. EQ Out/In – Engages / disengages the equalizer for the FX channel.
11. Aux Sends –
•
Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux channels.
•
Adjustable sliders send signal to the associated Aux channel output.
•
Mute indicates if the channel’s send to an Aux is muted or not.
12. EQ Handles – Touch, hold, and drag to change the Frequency and Gain of the associated EQ band. The frequency band button
must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
13. Low Cut Filter and Shelf filters 1 and 2 – These buttons engage or disengage the associated filter.
NOTE: To adjust the following parameters, select the field then use the Master encoder or the up/down nudge buttons on a
mobile device.
14. Gain, shelf filters 1 and 2 – Displays and adjusts gain (+/- 15 dB) of the frequency band.
15. Low-Cut filter frequency – Displays and adjusts the knee frequency for the high and low cut filters.
16. Shelf filters 1and 2 frequency adjustment fields – Displays and adjusts the center frequency for both parametric EQ
bands.
17. Aux number & name – Displays the system numbers and user-defined names for the Aux mixes.
18. M – Indicates if the FX channel send to the Aux mix is muted. You can change this in the FX Masters Auxes tab.
1001108-01-F
75
FX Masters − EQ
Touch FX
Masters
Home
Controls and displays the settings for the FX Master
channel equalization.
Touch an
FX Channel
Touch the
EQ Tab
FX Masters
1.
EQ Tab – Selects the FX Master EQ screen.
2.
EQ In/Out – Engages / bypasses the
equalizer.
RTA On – Enables the Real Time Analyzer.
Reset – Sets the equalizer to factory default
(flat).
RTA – 1/3 octave Real Time Analyzer display
of the post-EQ signal.
3.
4.
5.
Main Mix
L/R
1
Scene:
Overview
Joe’s Ears
EQ
FX 1
Inputs 1-8
EQ
Effect
Auxes
2
Presets
3
Default
Prev
4
Next
FX 1
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
5
Cue
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
FX
Main
1
L/R
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
1
Aux 7/8
5
5
7
L
u
L
u
AF
5
5
48
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
20
0
Aux 10
8
20
0
9
Aux 11
10
Aux 11
EQ Graph – A graphic representation of the
EQ settings. The vertical measurement is gain,
11
the horizontal is frequency.
7. EQ Handles – Touch, hold, and drag
to change the Frequency and Gain of the
associated EQ band. The frequency band button must be engaged to see the EQ Handles.
8. Low Cut – Adjusts the low cut (high pass) filter frequency.
9. Shelf Filter Buttons – Engages / bypasses the individual shelf filters.
10. Gain – Adjusts the gain of the associated shelf filter over a range of -15 dB to +15 dB.
11. Freq – Sets the frequency of the associated shelf filter.
10
40
40
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
76
∞
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
1001108-01-F
10
10
6
2
6.
Cue
Aux 3
G
NOTE: When the RTA is off, the
Parametric EQ graph expands to use the
entire graph area.
Main
Aux 2
Aux 5
NOTE: A maximum of two RTA
displays are available at a time on any
combination of a mixer and tablet devices.
Setup
11
11
Mute
Mute
FX Masters − Presets
Recall presets for the selected FX channel based on the
current FX device.
1.
Presets tab – Selects the Presets screen.
2.
Press Home
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
FX 1
Presets
Current Preset – Displays the name of
the currently active preset (if any).
3. Save / Save As button – Displays
a page with options for naming a scene and
selecting internal or USB storage destination.
4. Factory list – Displays a list of the factory
programmed presets available for the currently
loaded FX device. Touch a preset name to select.
5. Mixer (internal) list – Displays a list
of presets that have been stored to Internal
mixer memory.
6. USB (external) list – Displays a list of
presets that have been saved on an External
(USB) drive.
7. Delete button – Deletes a selected preset
from Internal or External user memory.
8. Copy to USB button – Copies the
selected preset to an external USB Drive.
9. Copy to Mixer button – Copies the
selected preset to the internal mixer memory.
10. Recall button – Recalls the effects
parameters of a preset selected in the Factory,
Mixer or USB list. Recall does not affect Aux Sends, EQ, Mutes, or Group assignments.
1001108-01-F
77
Touch
FX Masters
Select an
FX Channel
Touch
Presets
FX Master − Setup
Rename the FX Master channel, and assign the channel
to Mute and DCA Groups
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Setup tab – Selects the Setup screen.
Name field – Touch to display a keyboard
and enter a name for the channel.
Reset button – Returns settings to the
factory default.
Effect Pick-Off – Selects a pre or postfader pick-off point for the effect send.
Main L/R button – Turns the FX channel’s
assignment to the Main Left / Right output on
and off.
DCA Group Assignment Buttons
– Select the DCA Groups this channel is to be
part of. See the DCA Groups topic.
Mute Group Assignment Buttons
– Select the Mute Groups this channel is to be
part of. See the Mute Groups topic.
Touch an
FX Channel
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
FX 1
Setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1001108-01-F
Touch FX
Masters
Press Menu
78
Touch
Setup
FX Master − Auxes
These sends allow the effect to be returned to mixes
for stage monitors, in ear monitors, remote speakers or
video / broadcast.
1.
Auxes tab – Selects the Aux Sends screen
2.
Touch the
FX Masters
Bank
Home
Touch
Auxes
Tab
Touch an FX
Channel
FX Masters
FX 1
Inputs 1-8
Auxes
Main Mix
L/R
Overview
EQ
Effect
1
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Scene:
Default
Next
Prev
Aux Overview button – Navigates to
3
2
Main
FX 1
the Aux Overview which displays all Aux mixes
Aux Sends
on a single screen.
6
7
5
4
8
9
1
Joe’s Aux
3. Reset button – Resets all Aux Sends
Aux 2
2
controls, for the selected input channel, to the
3
Aux 3
factory default.
4
4. Aux send system number –Displays
Aux 4
1
L/R
the number of the associated Aux Output.
5
Aux 5
10
5. Aux Mix name – Displays the Aux mix
Aux 6
11
name. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux
Aux 7
output controls.
Aux 8
6. Aux send sliders – Set the level of audio
9
Aux 9
sent from the channel to the Aux output; -40 dB
(-Inf) is off. Sliders are color coded.
10
Aux 10
7. Gain readout – Provides a numeric display
11
Aux 11
of the Aux send level.
∞
12
Aux 12
8. Mute button – Mutes the send from the
13
Aux 13
channel to the associated Aux mix. Does not
14
Aux 14
effect any other mixes.
9. Pick-off point button – Indicates if
the Aux Buss is taking a Pre Fdr/ Post Fdr / Pre Dyn / Pre All signal. Touch to navigate to the associated Aux output
setup screen to change the setting.
10. Aux link indicator – Indicates the Aux channels are linked. You can link Aux channels from an Input channel Aux Sends screen by
touching one of the Aux Master buttons, or one of the pick-off buttons. Both take you to the Aux channel Setup screen where linking is
accomplished.
11. Aux sends pan-slider – Pans the signal between a linked pair of auxes.
Joe’s Ears
Aux Overview
Aux 1
Reset
Aux 2
Aux 2
-3.0
Mute
Pre Fdr
-28.0
Mute
Post Fdr
-3.0
Mute
Pre Dyn
-12.0
Mute
Pre All
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 3
L
Aux 4
Aux 4
C
Cue
R
Mic
Aux 5
Aux 5/6
Main
10
10
5
5
Aux 7
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
L
u
u
Aux 7
AF
-inf
Aux 8
Mute
5
Pre Fdr
5
Aux 8
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
-inf
Mute
Pre Fdr
Aux 10
Aux 10
20
0
20
0
Aux 11
Aux 11
LR
40
40
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
79
Mute
Mute
FX Overview
Provides an overview of the channel FX Send and
Return levels.
FX sends and FX Master levels may be adjusted by
touching (selecting) the control then using the Master
Encoder or the Nudge buttons on a tablet device.
Press Menu
FX
Overview
Menu
1
2
FX Overview Screen
NOTE: Only Input and Sub
Group banks are selectable on the
Nav Strip.
1.
Select an Input or Sub Group bank.
2.
Each column (In 1, In 2 ...) represents a channel,
and lists the channel’s six FX Sends.
Each row represents an FX mix, and lists the FX
Sends for the mix.
FX Master fader – Adjusts the overall
level of the effect that will be heard in the mix.
FX Processor Icon – Indicates the
currently selected FX device for the FX mix.
3.
4.
5.
1001108-01-F
Touch FX
Overview
4
5
3
80
Wizards
FX Wizard
The FX Wizard aids in selecting and routing effects.
1.
FX1 - 6 tabs – Selects one of six
FX processors. (Four on TouchMix-8 and
TouchMix-16)
Press Wizard
Touch
FX Wizard
FX Wizard
Wizard
NOTE: The Source, Type, and FX
Preset windows provide a means of
selecting an Effect based on what the
source is. If any of the lists fill the window,
flick up on the list to show more selections.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Source list – Use the Source window to
select the source instrument category.
Type list – Use the Type windows to select
the specific type of instrument. This narrows
the selection to a list of recommended presets
appropriate for the application.
FX Preset list – Use the FX Preset window
to select the Effect and variation. For example,
in the FX Preset window the letter “D” refers to
the Dense Reverb Effect, and the text following
the letter indicates the Preset (variation) of the
Dense Reverb.
Recall button – Loads selected effect.
Clear button – Unassigns all the inputs
and outputs.
Select inputs to feed
Label – Each input channel is represented by a button. Touch one or more of these
buttons to apply the effect to an input.
Cue button – Touch Cue above the FX fader to hear the output of the selected effect on the Cue system.
Select Aux Output buttons – Each Aux Output is represented by a button. Touch one or more of these buttons to send the
effect to the associated Aux Output.
1001108-01-F
81
Gain Wizard
The Gain Wizard monitors input clipping and provides an
indication of how much input gain reduction is needed.
Press Wizard
Gain Wizard
Wizard
NOTE: The Gain Wizard provides an
indication of the frequency and intensity of
clipping to aid in proper adjustment of
input sensitivity.
1.
Reset Button – Use this to clear the Gain
Wizard after adjusting the input sensitivity.
2.
Tick-Mark Counters – Indicates
how many tick marks to turn the Trim knob
counterclockwise to prevent clipping.
Trim Knob – Turn this knob (on the TouchMix
surface) the number of tick marks indicated on
the Tick-Mark counter.
3.
1001108-01-F
82
Touch
Gain Wizard
Room Tuning Wizard
The Room Tuning Wizard assists in adjusting output
equalization
1.
Tuning Output – Displays the system and
friendly name of the output being tuned.
2.
3.
Restart – Go back and start over.
Clear Tuning EQ – Resets the GEQ, for
the currently selected output to the factory
default.
Select Output buttons – Touch the
output to be tuned.
Select Measurement Method
– Each method progressively adds more
measurement spots to increase the accuracy of
the settings.
The Skip Measurement, Use Previous method
allows measurement data from the last tuning to
be used.
Next – moves the Wizard to the next step.
Follow the instructions on the subsequent
screens. (see below)
4.
5.
6.
When finished, touch the “Navigate to GEQ” button. The
settings display on the output GEQ screen. An outline of
the fader knob indicates the tuning wizard settings.
Touch an
Output
Home
Aux 1
Wizard
OR
Touch GEQ
Main
GEQ
Press
Wizard
Tuning Wizard
Tuning Wizard
1
2
4
5
The following illustrations show the procedure.
6
1001108-01-F
Touch Tuning
OR
Wizard
83
3
Touch
Tuning
Wizard
— Step 3 —
— Step 1 —
— Step 4 —
— Step 2 —
1001108-01-F
— Step 5 —
84
FX Processor
FX Processor – Basic Chorus
The Chorus FX Varies the pitch of a signal at a steady
rate to “thicken” a sound.
You can access the Effects from the Inputs and Sub
Group banks.
1.
Effect – Touch to select an Effect Type.
2.
Preset – Name of the current preset. Touch
to access the library of Presets.
Simple button – Turns Simple mode on
and off. Hides all but the essential controls on
the selected FX. Not present on Mono and
Stereo Delay effects.
Reset button – Returns processor and
Aux Send controls to their default settings.
Input meter – Displays the incoming audio
level before the Effect.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Output meter – Display the audio level
after the Effect.
7.
Touch the
FX Masters
Bank
Home
Touch an
FX Channel
Touch
Effect PullDown
Touch the
Effect Tab
FX Masters
Effect
FX 1
Inputs 1-8
Effect
+
None
Touch Chorus
Chorus
Main Mix
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
Scene:
Overview
EQ
Effect
1
Auxes
Presets
3
2
Setup
Default
4
FX 1
Aux 1
Aux 2
Main
6
5
Aux 2
Next
Prev
Cue
Aux 3
Cue
Aux 3
L
Aux 4
C
R
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
FX
Main
1
L/R
Aux 6
10
10
Aux 6
Aux 7
7
8
9
10
11
L
Aux 7
L
Aux 8
G
u
u
AF
5
5
48
Aux 8
5
5
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
LFO Rate knob – Determines the rate at
which the pitch will be varied.
8. LFO Depth knob – Controls the amount of
modulation applied to the audio signal.
9. LFO Type switch – Selects how the pitch
will be varied.
10. Lo Cut knob – Attenuates, or “cuts”
frequencies below this frequency setting. Range is 20 Hz to 2 kHz.
11. Hi Cut knob – Attenuates, or “cuts” frequencies above
this frequency setting. Range is 200 Hz to 20 kHz.
Type
12. FX Returns to Monitors
Aux 10
20
0
12
20
0
a
Aux 10
Aux 11
b
M
Aux 11
40
40
Aux 12
∞
∞
Aux 12
c
Aux 13
Aux 13
d
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
a. M – Indicates the Aux Send for the Effect is muted from the
Auxes tab.
Rate
b. Send Slider – Sets the level of the Effect to the Aux output,
typically the performer’s monitor.
c. Link icon – Indicates the Auxes are linked.
Depth
d. Aux Pan control – Pans between the two linked Auxes.
1001108-01-F
85
Saw
Sine
Slower
.35 Hz
Less Depth
.1
Faster
5.0 Hz
3.5
More Depth
Mute
FX Processor – Dense Reverb
The Dense Reverb (presets with a “D” suffix) is a model
of a DSP reverb with more dense reflections that some
may find more representative of actual acoustic spaces.
Home
Input channels and Sub Groups are able to send to
the effect.
Touch the
FX Masters
Bank
Touch an
FX Channel
Touch the
Effect Tab
Touch Effect
Pull-Down
FX Masters
Effect
FX 1
Inputs 1-8
Effect
None
+
Touch
Dense Reverb
Dense
Reverb
Main Mix
Scene:
1.
Effect – Touch to select an Effect Type.
2.
1
3
4
2
Preset – Name of the current preset. Touch
+
FX 1
+
to access the preset library.
5
6
Simple button – Turns Simple mode on
and off. Hides all but the essential controls on
the selected effect.
Reset button – Returns processor and
1
Aux Send controls to their default settings.
Input meter – Displays the incoming audio
7
8
9
10
11
12
level.
13
14
Output meter – Displays the posteffectaudio level.
Reverb Time – Reverb Time (RT) is the
15
length of time required for the reverberation to
a
drop by 60 dB.
b
Initial Delay knob – Sets the time interval
∞
between input signal and first reflection.
c
High Ratio knob – Changes the amount of
d
high frequency reflections.
Diffusion knob – Controls the density of groups of Early Reflections. Or Simulates the complexity of surfaces off which the
sound reflects.
Reverb Delay knob – Changes the delay between reflections.
Early Reflect knob – Changes the amplitude of the early reflections.
Lo Cut knob – Attenuates, or “cuts” frequencies below this frequency setting. Range is to 20 Hz to 2 kHz.
Hi Cut knob – Attenuates, or “cuts” frequencies above this frequency setting. Range is 200 Hz to 20 kHz.
FX Returns to Monitors – Sliders adjust the level of the effect heard in the performers’ monitors.
L/R
Overview
EQ
Effect
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Default
Next
Prev
Joe’s Monitor
Main
Aux 1
Aux 2
3.
Aux 2
Cue
Aux 3
Cue
Aux 3
L
Aux 4
4.
C
R
Aux 4
FX
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
5.
10
10
Aux 6
5
5
Aux 7
6.
Main
L/R
Aux 7
L
Aux 8
G
Aux 8
48
u
L
u
F
5
5
10
10
Aux 9
7.
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 11
M
Aux 11
8.
40
40
Aux 12
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
9.
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
a. M – Indicates the Aux Send for the Effect is muted from the Auxes tab.
b. Send slider – Sets the level of the Effect to the Aux output.
c. Link icon – Indicates the Auxes are linked.
d. Aux Pan control – Pans between the two linked Auxes.
1001108-01-F
86
Mute
FX Processor – Lush Reverb
Reverb presets with an “L” suffix use a DSP reverb
model with a more “lush” character.
1.
2.
Home
Effect – Name of the current Effect. Touch to
select an Effect Type.
Touch the
FX Masters
Bank
Touch an
FX Channel
Touch Effect
Pull-Down
FX Masters
Inputs 1-8
FX 1
Effect
Effect
None
Touch
Lush Reverb
Lush
Reverb
+
Preset – Name of the current preset. Touch
Overview
EQ
Effect
Auxes
Presets
to access the library of Presets.
Simple button – Turns Simple mode on
3
4
2
1
+
+
and off. Hides all but the essential controls on
6
5
the selected FX. Not present on Mono
and Stereo Delay effects.
8
7
Reset button – Returns processor and
Aux Send controls to default settings.
Input meter – Displays the level of
incoming, mono audio signal.
9
10
11
12
13
14
Output meter – Displays the stereo level
of the processed output signal.
Low Cut – Attenuates, or “cuts” frequencies
below the set frequency. Range is 20 Hz to
15
2 kHz.
a
Hi Cut – Attenuates, or “cuts” frequencies
b
above the set frequency. Range is 200 Hz
to 20 kHz.
c
Size – Adjusts dimension of the simulated
d
acoustic space in meters.
Pre Delay – Sets the time interval between
input signal and first reflection
Low Reverb – Adjusts the reverb decay time for frequencies below the crossover frequency.
Crossover – Sets the crossover point for the Low Reverb Time and the High Reverb Time.
High Reverb – Adjusts the reverb decay time for frequencies above the crossover frequency.
Diffusion – Adjusts the early reflections to simulate a more or less complex reflective acoustic surface.
FX Returns to Monitors:
Main Mix
L/R
3.
Touch the
Effect Tab
Scene:
Setup
Default
Next
Prev
Joe’s Monitor
FX 1
Aux 1
Main
Aux 2
Aux 2
Cue
Aux 3
4.
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 4
L
C
R
Aux 4
5.
Aux 5
Aux 5
FX
Main
1
L/R
Aux 6
10
10
Aux 6
6.
Aux 7
L
u
Aux 7
Aux 8
u
F
5
Aux 8
7.
5
5
5
48
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
20
0
20
0
Aux 10
8.
Aux 11
M
Aux 11
LR
40
40
Aux 12
Aux 12
9.
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
∞
∞
Aux 14
a. M – Indicates the Aux Send for the Effect is muted from the Auxes tab.
b. Send Slider – Sets the level of the Effect to the Aux output.
c. Link icon – Indicates the Auxes are linked.
d. Aux Pan control – Pans between the two linked Auxes.
1001108-01-F
87
Mute
Mute
FX Processor – Mono and Stereo DelayTouch the
These effects delay the audio signal to create echo and
similar effects. Controls for the stereo delay may be
linked or operated independently.
Home
Input channels and Sub Groups are able to send to
the effect.
Touch an
FX Channel
FX Masters
Bank
Touch the
Effect Tab
FX Masters
Effect
FX 1
Inputs 1-8
Touch Stereo
or Mono
Delay
Touch Effect
Pull-Down
Effect
None
Stereo or Mono
Delay
+
Main Mix
1.
Effect – Touch to select a different Effect Type.
2.
Preset – Displays the name of the current
preset. Touch to access the preset library.
3.
4.
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
Scene:
Overview
EQ
Effect
1
2
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Default
4
3
In 1
Aux 1
Aux 2
5
Aux 2
Next
Prev
Main
6
Cue
Aux 3
Cue
Reset – Returns processor and Aux Send
7
controls to their default settings.
Input – Displays the incoming audio level
1
L/R
before the Effect.
Output – Displays the post-effect audio
9
9
10
10
8
8
level.
11
12
Link Button – (Stereo Delay only)
– Links all controls of both channels. Channel
two is set to the same level as Channel one.
13
a
Delay Knob – Sets the delay time in
milliseconds.
b
Tap Tempo Button – Sets the tempo
∞
c
of the regenerations by tapping. Touch the Tap
Tempo button, then tap the Master Control knob
d
at a steady rate.
Regen Knob – Adjusts the amount of
delayed signal that is sent back to the input. At 0% only the first echo will be heard. At 99% the echo will repeat indefinitely at the
same level.
Lo Cut Knob – Attenuates, or “cuts” frequencies below this frequency setting. Range is 20 Hz to 2 kHz.
Hi Cut Knob – Attenuates, or “cuts” frequencies above this frequency setting. Range is 200 Hz to 20 kHz.
FX Returns to Monitors – Sliders adjust the level of the effect heard in the performers’ monitors.
Aux 3
L
Aux 4
C
R
Aux 4
5.
Mic
Aux 5
Main
Aux 5
Aux 6
6.
7.
10
10
Aux 6
5
Tap
Tempo
Aux 7
Tap
Tempo
5
L
Aux 7
L
Aux 8
G
Aux 8
48
u
F
u
5
5
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
8.
0
Aux 11
LR
40
1
2
3
4
Aux 12
5
6
Aux 13
7
8
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
10.
11.
12.
13.
20
Aux 10
Aux 11
9.
20
0
Aux 10
a. M – Indicates the Aux Send for the Effect is muted from the Auxes tab.
b. Send Slider – Sets the level of the Effect to the Aux output.
c. Link icon – Indicates the Auxes are linked.
d. Aux Pan control – Pans between the two linked Auxes.
1001108-01-F
88
Mute
40
∞
FX Processor – Pitch Shift
The Pitch Shift raises or lowers the pitch of an audio
signal by a fixed interval. In addition, the signal can be
delayed from the original. The two output channels can
be adjusted independently.
1.
Effect – Touch to select an Effect Type.
2.
Preset – Name of the current preset. Touch
to access the library of Presets.
Simple button – Turns Simple mode on
and off. Hides all but the essential controls on
the selected FX. Not present on Mono and
Stereo Delay effects.
Reset button – Returns processor and
Aux Send controls to their default settings.
Input meter – Displays the incoming audio
level before the Effect.
Output meter – Display the audio level after
the Effect.
Left and Right Shift knobs – Set the
amount of shift, down (-) or up (+) for the two
output channels.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Touch an
FX Channel
Touch the
Effect Tab
Touch Effect
Pull-Down
FX Masters
Effect
FX 1
Inputs 1-8
Effect
None
Touch
Pitch Shift
Pitch
Shift
+
Main Mix
Scene:
Default
L/R
Overview
Joe’s Ears
Aux 1
Effect
Auxes
Presets
2
Setup
Next
Prev
4
3
FX 1
Main
6
5
Aux 2
Aux 3
Cue
Cue
Aux 3
L
Aux 4
C
R
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
7
7
10
FX
Main
1
L/R
10
10
10
5
5
Aux 7
8
Aux 7/8
9
L
u
L
u
F
5
G
5
48
10
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
a
Aux 11
100¢ = 1 half step,
•
200 ¢ = 1 whole step,
Aux 12
•
1200¢ = 1 octave
Aux 13
8.
EQ
1
Aux 2
Aux 11
•
Touch the
FX Masters
Bank
Home
b
LR
Aux 12
c
Aux 13
d
Aux 14
20
0
11
20
0
40
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mute
∞
∞
Mute
Lo Cut knob – Attenuates, or “cuts” audio
below the set frequency. Range is 20 Hz to 2 kHz.
9. Hi Cut knob – Attenuates, or “cuts” audio above the set frequency. Range is 200 Hz to 20 kHz.
10. Rotating the Master Encoder will change the amount of pitch shift in half-step intervals. For finer adjustments, hold the Encoder down
while adjusting.
11. Left and Right Delay knobs – Adds up to 100 milliseconds of delay to the Pitch Shift output.
12. FX Returns to Monitors:
Aux 14
a. M – Indicates the Aux Send for the Effect is muted from the Auxes tab.
b. Send slider – Sets the level of the Effect to the Aux output, typically the performer’s monitor.
c. Link icon – Indicates the Auxes are linked.
d. Aux Pan control – Pans between the two linked Auxes.
1001108-01-F
89
FX Processor – Pitch Correct
Touch
an Input Bank
Home
Corrects intonation of the audio signal.
IMPORTANT!: Pitch-Correct may
be enabled/disabled by User Buttons
without regards to the position of the
Enable button on this screen. If you don’t
hear any difference with Pitch Correct
enabled, check to make sure the feature
has not been disabled using the User
Button feature. Refer to the User Button
topic.
2.
Touch
the FX Tab
Input 1-8
FX
In 1
Inputs 1-8
Main Mix
L/R
Scene:
Overview
EQ
Comp
Gate
FX
Auxes
Presets
Setup
Default
Next
Prev
Joe’s Monitor
FX Overview
Aux 1
Simple
Reset
In 1
Main
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
FX Buses
Chorus
Aux 3
Aux 4
Pitch Correct Enable button –
Assigns Pitch Correct to the currently selected
channel and enables/disables the effect.
Aux 5
Cue
Joe’s FX
-20
-40
-10
Hz
10
U
-11.5
Dense Reverb
Pre/Post
Fader
Global FX Parameters
FX 1
Aux 4
1.
Touch an
In Channel
FX 2
Rate
Depth
2.3
0.63
Pre
FX 2
-20
-40
-10
Sec
10
U
Aux 5
-23.0
Rev Time
mSec
Initial Delay
34.0
0.00
Post
L
C
Mic
Main
1
L/R
Aux 6
Aux 6
Cue
R
10
10
Lush Reverb
FX 3
FX 3
Key knob – Selects a key for the pitch
corrector to use in determining the target note. If
Mono Delay
FX 4
“None” is selected, the Pitch Corrector will target
the nearest chromatic pitch. The table shows the
None
FX 5
Key selections.
Blend knob – Sets the ratio of uncorrected
(Dry) to corrected (Wet) signal. When fully
Basic Chorus
FX 6
clockwise, only corrected signal will be heard.
When fully counter clockwise, only the original
1
signal will be heard. Intermediate settings will
Pitch Correct
result in a doubling effect.
Correct Rate knob – determines how quickly the pitch is corrected.
Aux 7
-40
-20
-10
m
10
U
-inf
Aux 7
Size
mSec
C
Pre Delay
1.43
0.5
Pre
FX 4
-40
Aux 9
L
u
L
-20
-10
mSec
10
U
-inf
Delay
5
48
%
u
AF
5
G
Aux 8
Aux 8
5
5
10
10
Regen
1.7
0.5
Pre
Aux 9
Aux 10
3.
-40
-20
-10
10
U
-inf
Aux 11
Param 1
Param 2
32
0.00
Rate
Depth
1.5
0.5
LR
FX 6
-40
Aux 12
-20
-10
Hz
10
U
-inf
Pre
Aux 13
2
Aux 13
Aux 14
Enable
Aux 14
4.
Key Selection
1001108-01-F
None
E
A
C
F
A sharp / B flat
C sharp / D flat
F sharp / G flat
B
D
G
D sharp / E flat
G sharp / A flat
90
Key
3
E
Blend
Amount
Dry
20%
Wet
Correct
Rate
20
0
Pre
Aux 11
Aux 12
20
0
FX 5
Aux 10
40
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
∞
∞
4
Slow
8.3
Fast
Mute
Mute
Remote Connections
NOTE: For remote devices only. Lists
any TouchMix mixers found on the network
to which your device is connected.
When multiple TouchMix mixers are connected to a
single network, this page is used to select a single
mixer to control with a tablet device.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
List of mixers connected to the same network as
your device. In the example there are three mixers.
The blue highlight indicates which mixer is
selected. Touch the name of a mixer to change
the selection.
Select button – Touch this button to
connect your device to the selected network.
Cancel button – Touch this button to
close the dialog without making any changes.
Example “5” shows a mixer (My TM-30) that
created a network, and the remote device that
is viewing the “Remote Connections” page, is
connected to the created network.
1001108-01-F
Press Menu
Menu
Touch
Network
Network
Found Mixers on Network:
Found Mixers on Network:
Found Mixers
Found Mixers
1
2
FOH TM-30
None (offline)
5
Garage TM-30
My TM-30
TM-30 - practice only
3
Select
91
4
Cancel
Select
Cancel
Security
Provides four levels of password-enabled security to
TouchMix functionality.
Login Screen
1.
2.
3.
4.
Current Login – The level of the person currently
logged in.
Security Settings button – Touch to access
the Security Settings where passwords can be set for all levels.
Logout / Lock button – Touch to logout of
the Security Settings.
Enter Password – Touch the white area
to enter a password. If passwords are not set, go
directly to the Security Settings.
Security Setup
Touch
Security
Press Menu
Menu
Security
Main Mix
Scene:
Security Setup
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
Current Login:
Aux 1
Default
1
2
Security not enabled
3
Security Settings
Logout / Lock
Main
Aux 2
Aux 2
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Main
Aux 5
L/R
Aux 5
Aux 6
10
Aux 6
Enter Password:
Aux 7
4
5
L
u
AF
Aux 7
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
IMPORTANT!: Setting the password for
Administrator enables the Security feature. Leave
this field empty to operate the mixer without
security restrictions. However, If the mixer is
accessible to others, it may be a good idea to enter
an administrator password to prevent mischievous
or inadvertent password creation that would lock
you out of your own mixer.
NOTE: Forgotten Administrator Password?
Contact QSC Technical Support.
1.
2.
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
40
Aux 12
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
Current Login – The level of the person currently
Press Menu
logged in.
Close Security Settings button – Touch
to return to the Security Setup page where can login again, or
press Home to exit.
Security Setup
Logout / Lock button – Touch to logout of the
1
Security Settings, displays the Login button.
Current Login:
Security not enabled
Set Passwords – Enter a password in one of the
text boxes to protect the corresponding functions. Leave the
5 Administrator
field blank if you want to give anyone access to that level of
Set Password:
4
functionality.
Administrator – Setting a Password enables
All Access
security. Logging in as Administrator gives access to all mixer
6
4
Set Password:
functions including Security Settings. Be certain to remember
this password!
All Access – Allows access to all mixer functions
Simple Mode Only
7
except Security Setup.
Set Password:
4
Simple Mode Only – Allows access to all simplemode mixer functions for screens having a Simple / Advance
choice, and all other functions except Security Setup.
8 Levels Only
Levels Only – Access to level controls only.
4
Set Password:
Overwrite Scenes & Presets – Allows or
denies the ability to change a Scene or Preset in user memory.
12
Hours:
1
Auto-lock
Recall Scenes – Allows or denies the ability to recall
a scene from memory.
Recall Presets – Allows or denies the ability to recall
a preset from memory.
Auto Lock On/Off– Automatically logs out the current password after a preset period.
Hours and Minutes – Sets the amount of time it takes for the Auto Lock to be activated.
Menu
Security
Touch
Security
Touch Security
Settings
Security Settings
Main Mix
3.
Scene:
Default
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
4.
20
0
Aux 10
2
Aux 1
3
Close Security Settings
Logout / Lock
Main
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Overwrite Scenes
Recall Scenes
and Presets
Aux 3
On
On
9
10
Recall Presets
Cue
On
Aux 4
5.
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Overwrite Scenes
Recall Scenes
and Presets
11
Main
Recall Presets
L/R
Aux 6
Aux 6
6.
On
Off
On
Off
On
5
Aux 7
L
Aux 7
AF
Aux 8
Aux 8
7.
10
Off
Aux 9
Overwrite Scenes
Recall Scenes
and Presets
u
5
Recall Presets
10
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
8.
9.
Overwrite Scenes
Recall Scenes
and Presets
Recall Presets
Aux 11
Aux 12
40
Off
On
Off
Off
On
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
10.
Off
Aux 14
Aux 14
11.
12.
13.
1001108-01-F
92
On
13
Minutes:
15
Mute
Miscellaneous Features
Menu
Press Menu
The Menu provides links to various utility, setup and other functions.
Touch a button to access the functionality.
1. Scenes – (Scenes on page 103)
2. DCA Groups – (DCA Group Assignments on
Menu
page 108)
3. Talkback – (Talkback / Noise on page 110)
Main
1
2
3
4
4. Patch Matrix – (Patch Matrix
DCA
Patch
Talkback
Scenes
(TouchMix-30 Pro only) on page 120)
(Noise)
Groups
Matrix
5. FX Overview – (FX Overview on page 80)
5
6
8
7
6. Channel Safe – (Channel Safe on page
Auto
External
FX
Channel
104)
Mixer
Faders
Overview
Safe
L/R
7. Auto Mixer – (Auto Mixer TouchMix-30 Pro
on page 105)
Clear
8. External Faders – (“External Control
9
10
11
12
Surfaces - TouchMix-30 Pro” on page 106)
Clip
Mute
Cue
Copy/Paste
Clear functions
9. Clip – Resets clip indications on the Nav Strip.
The clip indications are cleared only on the device
on which the clear Clip button was pressed. By
Setup
Screen Mode
15
16
20
13
14
21
default, User Button 2 (TouchMix-30 Pro only) also
performs this function.
17
18
19
22
23
10. Mute – Unmutes all Mutes except Mute
Groups, and DCA Mutes.
11. Cue – Clears the Cue. By default, User Button 3
also performs this function.
Tablet Buttons
12. Copy/Paste – Remove any copied
Setup
Screen Mode
information from the mixer’s clipboard.
13
14
15
20
21
Setup functions
13. Mixer Setup – (Mixer Setup on page 96)
17
19
22
14. User Buttons – (User Buttons on page
95)
15. Custom Banks – “Custom Fader Banks TouchMix-30 Pro” on page 107
16. MIDI – (MIDI on page 109)
17. Network –
a. Mixer only: Setup Wireless and Wired networks on the Mixer. (TouchMix Wi-Fi Control on page 111)
b. Tablets only: Select a mixer from a list of mixers on the network to which your tablet is connected . (Remote Connections on page 91)
18. Remote Control Settings – Not available on remote devices. (Remote Control Settings on page 94)
19. Security – (Security on page 92)
Screen Mode functions
20. Simple – displays a reduced set of controls on all screens having Advanced and Simple mode.
21. Advanced – displays and allows access to all controls on all screens having Advanced and Simple mode.
Menu
Main Mix
Scene:
Default
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Main
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
10
Aux 6
Aux 7
5
L
AF
Aux 7
Aux 8
u
5
Aux 8
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
0
Aux 10
20
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
Mixer Setup
User Buttons
Custom Banks
Network
Remote Control
Security
MIDI
Simple
Advanced
Aux 12
40
∞
Aux 13
Aux 13
Language
Resume Demo
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
NOTE:
Mixer Setup
User Buttons
Network
Security
Custom Banks
Simple
Advanced
Language
Switching from Advanced to Simple will not change any control value settings.
22. Language – Select 中文, Deutsch, English, Français, Русский, Español. The languages changes for the Info screens and the
Demo screens. Language selection may also be changed in the Info system.
23. Resume Demo – If Demo Mode (see Mixer Setup) is On, and the Demo is stopped, touching this button restarts the Demo without
having to wait for the 15-minute timeout.)
1001108-01-F
93
Remote Control Settings
Menu
NOTE: When a remote device is set to
Personal Monitor Mix, the Cue and Mute
buttons are not available on the Aux-Mixon-Faders.
Remote Control
Main Mix
L/R
Scene:
Remote Control Settings
Default
Joe’s Monitor
Main
Aux 1
Aux 2
1
Aux 2
NOTE: Some Android™ devices use the
model number as the device name. This may
cause contentions if there is more than one
of the same model device (name) connected
to TouchMix. To avoid this situation, turn on
Bluetooth on the Android device, and change
the device’s name to something unique.
Bluetooth must remain on to prevent
reverting to the model number.
Access Control:
Devices
Aux 3
Joe’s iPhone
Aux 3
House iPad
Personal Monitor
Mix
1.
Devices – Displays a list of devices that are or
have been connected to the mixer. Touch a device
name to set up its access.
2.
3
2a
Main Mix
Aux 1
Aux 1
Aux 8
Aux 8
2b
Record
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 7
2c
Aux 7
User Buttons
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 14
Aux 14
u
F
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
10
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
20
0
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
40
∞
Aux 12
4
Aux 13
Remove Device
Aux 13
Aux 14
5
Save
Mute
Aux 14
c. User Buttons – Access to the User Buttons.
d. Auxiliary Channels – Access to one or more aux channel (stage monitor) mixes.
Full Access – The device has access to all software controlled mixer functions.
Security Settings – (not shown) If enabled, a password is required. See the Security topic.
Remove Device – Removes the selected device from the list.
Save – Saves the settings and sends a message to the device listing available functions.
1001108-01-F
5
L
b. Record – Control of the recording transport and setup function.
4.
5.
Main
L/R
10
Aux 6
a. Main Mix – Control of the Main mix functions.
•
2d
Aux 6
Personal Monitor Mix – Enables access to a combination of these functions.
3.
Cue
Full Access
2
George’s Android
Aux 4
Aux 9
When a new device connects to the mixer’s network
and the TouchMix Control App is launched, the mixer
displays a message indicating that a new device is
connected.
Touch Remote
Control
Press Menu
Allows or restricts access to mixer functionality
by device.
94
User Buttons
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
User 1 through User 8 – Displays the
current Detail (function) assigned to the
selected User 1–8 button. Touch a button to edit
its function.
User Button Name – Displays the Detail name
associated with the selected User 1–8
button. Changing the function assigned to the
button will automatically enter a new name,
or touch the keyboard icon to enter a custom
name.
a. Action, b. Selection, c. Detail –
Select an item from each list in the order shown.
Assign – Touch to complete the assignment.
Reset – Resets the selected User 1–8
button to default setting.
Alternate Method of setting a User button to
navigate to a specific screen. Does not apply to remote
devices.
1.
2.
3.
Touch
User Buttons
Press Menu
Assign alternate functions to the User Buttons.
Menu
Main Mix
User Buttons
1
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 1
2
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
User 7
User 8
Nav Left
Clear Clip
Clear Cue
Nav Right
Play/Stop
Record/Stop
Copy
Paste
4
Nav Left
5
Assign
Scene:
Default
Main
Reset
Aux 2
Aux 2
3a
Aux 3
3b
Aux 3
Action
Aux 4
3c
Selection
Cue
Detail
Recall Input Preset
Selected Parameter
Nav Left
Aux 4
Recall Output Preset
Clear
Nav Right
Aux 5
Recall Scene
Pitch Correct
Fader to 0 dB
Aux 5
Mute
Miscellaneous
Fader off
Main
L/R
Go to Screen
Aux 6
10
Recording
Aux 6
Select
Aux 7
5
L
Utility
Aux 7
u
AF
Tap Tempo
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Navigate to the desired screen.
∞
Press and hold a user button for 2 – 3 seconds.
Upon release, a message displays. Touch Yes
to accept the change or Cancel to reject it.
4. If desired, assign the user button a friendly name
from the User Button Setup screen.
To return the user button to the factory default, press it one time to access the assigned page. Then push and hold the user button for 2-3 seconds.
Aux 11
40
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
NOTE: PITCH CORRECT – This function disables or enables the Pitch Correct feature, it does not affect the assignment
of the feature to a channel. The only way to tell if this feature is enabled or disabled at the User Button level is to see if you can hear a
difference when Pitch Correct is assigned to a channel. If you select Utility > Pitch Correct >, you need two user buttons, one to
enable the feature, the other to disable it. Refer to the Pitch Correction topic for information about assigning or enabling Pitch Correct
for a channel.
User button defaults:
TouchMix-30 Pro
TouchMix-8 / TouchMix-16
•
U1
– Navigate Left (moves the selection left)
•
U1
– Navigate Left (moves the selection left)
•
U2
– Clear Clip (clears clipping indication from the Nav Strip) •
U2
– Copy (see Copy & Paste)
•
U3
– Clear Cue (clears all cue selections)
•
U3
– Paste (see Copy & Paste)
•
U4
– Navigate Right (moves the selection right)
•
U4
– Navigate Right (moves the selection right)
•
U5
– Play/Stop (starts or stops playback)
•
U5
– Play/Stop (Tablet app only)
•
U6
– Rec/Stop (starts or stops recording)
•
U6
– Rec/Stop (Tablet app only)
•
U7
– Copy (see Copy & Paste)
•
U7
– Clear Clip (Tablet app only)
•
U8
– Paste (see Copy & Paste)
•
U8
– Clear Cue (Tablet app only)
1001108-01-F
95
Mixer Setup
Press Menu
Controls for various global and utility functions.
1.
Cue Mode – Sets the function of the channel
Cue buttons.
•
•
Cue (Default)– Touching a channel cue button
causes the channel’s signal to be heard in the
Cue headphones. The audio signal is otherwise
unaffected.
SIP (Solo In Place) – Input Cue buttons change
color (orange) and are labelled SIP. Touching
a channel’s SIP button causes all other inputs
to mute. Cue continues to function normally
for outputs. SIP is a very useful setup function
but can produce unwanted results if left on
during performance.
2.
Menu
Touch Mixer
Setup
Mixer Setup
Main Mix
Scene:
Default
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
Display Brightness
Main
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
1
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 4
2
7
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 5
Main
3
L/R
Aux 6
Aux 6
10
4
5
Aux 7
L
Aux 7
F
5
Demo Mode
u
1.00
Cue Pickoff – Determines if the Cue signal
is derived pre or post-fader.
6
• PFL (Pre-Fader Listen)
• AFL (After-Fader Listen)
8
9
10
3. Sample Rate – Selects the sample
frequency (bit rate) for the mixer. Most relevant
∞
for recording. Typically, 44100 is used for audio
CD, and 48000 for audio with video.
13
14
12
11
4. Dynamics Processing (global) –
Determines whether all input channel gates and
compressors are controlled by a pre or post EQ
signal.
5. Demo Mode and Confirm Mute
• Demo Mode (Mixer only) – The mixer is set at the factory to display a slide show of features until the screen is touched. This
control turns the demo on/off.
• Confirm Mute on Master (tablets only) – By default, muting a master output (Main or Aux bus) requires a confirmation.
This switch eliminates the confirmation step.
6. Omit Levels on Paste Overview – Provides an option to omit all level settings when pasting to an overview screen.
7. Display Brightness – Controls the brightness of the LCD screen and illuminated buttons.
8. Save System Log to USB – Writes a file to USB that may be useful in software troubleshooting.
9. Clear Storage – Deletes all user-defined presets and scenes from the mixer. Does not delete presets or scenes stored on a USB
device.
10. Reset Mixer – Resets all mixer controls to factory default. This does not erase any user presets on the mixer or on a USB drive.
11. Software Version Label – Displays the version number of the currently installed firmware.
12. Start Upgrade (Must Download First) – Begins the process of upgrading mixer software. Before starting, either visit
www.qsc.com for upgrade instructions and to download the latest firmware version, or go to the following step.
13. Check and Download Upgrade – This function is available on TouchMix-30 Pro with version 1.1 or higher and TouchMix-8
and TouchMix-16 with version 3.0 or higher. You must have an Internet connection and a USB drive (with about 250 MB free) to
download the upgrade files. When you use this method, follow the instructions on the screen. The mixer checks for the latest version,
and downloads it automatically. If you have the latest version, you will get a message indicating that.
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Save System Log to USB
Clear Storage
Reset Mixer
Aux 11
40
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Start Upgrade
(must download first)
Aux 14
Check and Download
Upgrade
End User Agreement
Mute
Aux 14
NOTE: For the TouchMix-30 Pro the Internet connection can be wired, or wireless via a compatible wireless adapter
(Part # CP-000033-00 is available from QSC) connecting to a wireless router with Internet access.
For the TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 you must connect via the wireless adapter to a wireless router with Internet access. or to a
router using a USB to Ethernet adapter.
14. End User Agreement – Displays the End User License Agreement for your reading pleasure.
1001108-01-F
96
Phantom Power
Press
Mic 48V
Supplies +48 VDC to XLR Inputs including Talkback.
1.
Reset – Returns all settings to factory default
(all phantom power off).
2.
Input Channel buttons – Touch
to enable or disable phantom power for the
channel.
Rear Panel View XLRs – Touch
to enable or disable phantom power for the
channel.
3.
NOTE: Phantom power may also be
controlled from the Setup screen of each
input channel.
NOTE: It is good practice to turn off
phantom power when connecting or
disconnecting an input. “Hot patching” a
device can cause severe transients and
potentially damaging current surges.
1001108-01-F
97
Mute Groups
Press Mute
Groups
Mute Groups provide a means of muting multiple inputs
and outputs from a single control.
Mute
Groups
About Mute Groups
When a channel is in one or more Mute Groups, all
Mute Groups containing the same channel and the
Channel Mute itself, must be unmuted for audio to pass.
When a channel is muted by a mute group, its mute
button will be colored orange.
Main Mix
Scene:
Mute Groups
L/R
1
Joe’s Monitor
1.
2.
Edit – Touch the Edit button to add or remove
channels from Mute Groups.
Mute Group – Touch any button to activate
or deactivate the Mute Group.
Main
Edit
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 3
1
Aux 4
Mute Groups Screen
Default
3
2
4
Aux 4
Main
Aux 5
Mute 1
Aux 5
Mute 3
Mute 2
L/R
Mute 4
Aux 6
10
Aux 6
2
Aux 7
Mute
5
L
Mute
Mute
Mute
u
F
Aux 7
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
5
6
7
8
Mute 5
Mute 6
Mute 7
Mute 8
Aux 10
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
40
Aux 12
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
Mute Group Edit Screen
1.
Mute Group select – Selects a Mute Group for
editing.
2.
User-defined name – Touch the name to display
a keyboard that may be used to enter a name for
the Mute Group.
Mute – Mutes / unmutes the channels
assigned to the Mute Group being edited.
Clear Assignments – Clears all
assignments from the selected Mute Group.
Close Edit – Returns to the Mute Group
Mute screen.
System-assigned channel numbers.
Assignment – Assigns / unassigns
a channel to the selected mute group and
indicates assignment status.
When a channel is muted by a Mute Group, the
color of the channel’s Mute button is orange.
When a channel is muted by the channel Mute
button and a Mute Group, the channel’s Mute
button is red. All mutes associated with a
channel must be unmuted for audio to pass.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
NOTE: Mute Groups may be assigned
to User Buttons. See the User Button topic
for more.
1001108-01-F
Press Mute
Groups
Mute
Groups
Main Mix
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
Edit
Touch
Edit
FX
1
Scene:
Mute Joe
2
Aux 1
Mute 2
Mute 3
Mute 4
3
Mute Joe
Mute Group Name
Mute 5
Mute
Mute 6
4
Mute 7
Clear Assignments
5
Mute 8
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
25/26
Inputs
6
1
Joe’s
Vocal
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
In 2
In 3
In 4
In 5
In 6
In 7
In 8
In 9
In 10
In 11
In 12
27/28
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
In 13
In 14
In 15
In 16
In 17
In 18
In 19
In 20
In 21
In 22
In 23
In 24
Stereo In
29/30
Aux 7
Aux 8
10
5
L
u
F
Aux 7
Aux 8
Main
L/R
29/30
Aux 6
Aux 6
Cue
Stereo In
25/26
Stereo In
27/28
Aux 5
Aux 5
Main
Close Edit
Aux 2
Aux 2
Default
5
Outputs
10
Aux 9
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 14
Joe’s
Monitor
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 14
FX 1
FX 2
FX 3
FX 4
FX 5
FX 6
USB
FX 1
FX 2
FX 3
FX 4
FX 5
FX 6
2-Trk PB
Aux 9
Aux 10
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
40
∞
Aux 12
L/R
Aux 13
Aux 13
Main
Aux 14
8
Mute
Aux 14
98
Record / Playback (Multitrack USB Drive)
Provides the controls to record and playback
multiple channels.
Rec/
Play
Recording
Mode
Press
Rec/Play
Touch
Recording
Mode
Touch
Multitrack
USB Drive
Multitrack
USB Drive
Record / Playback – Main Screen
IMPORTANT!: All USB memory
devices must be formatted as FAT32.
Drive performance is critical for
recording. For more information and to
see a list of qualified drives, visit qsc.
com.
NOTE: At the end of a session, the
recording must be stopped using the Stop/
Pause control. Stopping the recording
writes a header file that is required for the
tracks to play.
NOTE: All the standard channel
controls act as they do regardless of
record / playback status. For example, if
you Mute the channel that is recording, the
output gets muted, but recording of the
input continues.
1.
Input Channel controls – All input channel controls function as they do from the Home screen.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Arm – Arms the channel to be recorded when the Record button is pressed. Displays here and on the Home screen .
Track – When engaged, selects a recorded track as the audio source for the channel instead of the analog input.
USB Session – Displays the name of the active multi-track recording session.
Transport controls – Standard transport controls; Return to Start, Rewind, Play, Forward, Pause and Record.
Total record time counter – The total length of the recording in HH:MM:SS. If recording is in progress, this number grows
until the recording is ended.
7. Recording Mode – Displays a panel for selection of Stereo MP3, Multitrack or DAW (see the MP3 Audio Player and DAW topics).
8. Set – Moves the Locate pointer to the position of the Play pointer.
9. Go To – Moves the Play pointer to the position of the Locate pointer.
10. Play pointer – Indicates current record/playback position.
11. Locate pointer – Marks a location on the Time Line. The locate pointer may be moved by dragging on screen, by selecting and
turning the Master Encoder or using the Set button.
12. Progress indicator – Represents the session time line.
NOTE: Due to FAT23 file size limitations, the max continuous recording time is roughly three hours. A warning message is
displayed 10 minutes before the limit is reached. To continue recording, pause and then resume. It is not necessary to create a new
session. (see “Recording Directory Structure” for more).
13. Time code display – Displays position of the Play pointer in HH:MM:SS. Maximum record time is determined by the capacity of
the attached hard-disc drive.
14. Recording Setup – Navigates to the Recording Setup screen.
1001108-01-F
99
2‑Trk − Recording
Touch
Home
The Main L/R or Aux 13/14 can be recorded on a USB device,
then played back using 2‑Trk Playback.
Touch Stereo
In/2-Trk
Touch
2-Trk Rec
Stereo In/2-Trk
2‑Trk Recording Setup
The files created from recording are on the external USB
device installed in the mixer USB port. The files can be found
under <session name>.tmRecord\Track31\Region-1.wav
and \Track32\Region-1.wav.
You can stop recording, then resume and two more files are
created: \Track31\Region-2 and Track32\Region-2. The files
in each directory are concatenated for seamless playback
using 2‑Trk Playback.
Setup
2-Trk Rec
Inputs 1-8
Main Mix
Scene:
Setup
L/R
Joe’s Ears
1
Record
Aux 1
2-Trk Rec
Reset
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
2
Record Source
Select
Aux 13/14
2-Trk Rec
3
Record Pick-Off
Pre
Main LR
4
Post
1.
2.
3.
Channel Name – Touch the record field to
change the channel name.
Record Source Select buttons
– Select the source for 2‑Trk recording. Main L/R or
Aux 13/14.
Record Pick-Off switch – Determines
if the recorded audio is:
• Post – affected by the channel EQ and Dynamics,
or
Main
Recording
Cue
Aux 4
Aux 4
5
Aux 5
Aux 5
Export 2-Track
Cue
Arm
L
C
R
Record
Main
R
L/R
10
10
Aux 6
5
5
Aux 7
TouchMix-16 – Tracks 21 and 22
Default
Aux 2
Aux 6
For TouchMix-8 – Tracks 13 and 14
Next
Prev
L
L
Aux 7
G
Aux 8
48
u
u
F
5
5
10
Aux 8
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
0
Aux 10
20
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
40
40
Aux 12
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
• Pre – is not affected by the channel EQ and Dynamics.
4. Recording Arm button – When engaged, the source channels you selected are recorded when recording begins. This button is also
available on the Record/Play screen.
5. Export 2‑Trk – (TouchMix-30 Pro only) Converts 2‑track wave recording to MP3. Note that this operation is processor intensive and will take
some time.
1001108-01-F
100
DAW – Record / Playback (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Record to and Playback from a Digital Audio Workstation.
IMPORTANT!: The
TouchMix-30 Pro is capable of 32 x 32
channel USB audio interface to Windows
and macOS computers. Windows
interface requires a driver available for
download from QSC. No driver is
required for macOS operation.
1.
Track button – Touch the Track button to
select a DAW track as the source for the channel.
2.
DAW – Indicates if the mixer is receiving
audio from the DAW (Connected) or not (Not
Receiving Audio).
Sample Rate switch – Switches the
mixers sample rate between 44.1 kHz and 48
kHz. The mixer must be the sample rate clock
master.
Recording Mode button – Touch this
to change the Recording Mode to MP3 Playback
or Multitrack USB.
Channel Activity – Lights to indicate
audio is being received from the DAW on that
channel.
3.
4.
5.
Rec/
Play
Recording
Mode
Press
Rec / Play
Multitrack
DAW
NOTE: To manage connections on the Mac – Open “Audio MIDI Setup” and select “QSC TM30 Pro.
1001108-01-F
101
Touch
Recording
Mode
Touch
Multitrack
DAW
Real-time Analyzer (RTA)
Displays a real-time analyzer (RTA) for the
selected source.
•
TouchMix-30 Pro – Up to two RTA displays
are available at a time on any combination
of mixer and tablet devices.
•
TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 have one
RTA.
•
The RTA is not available on phone devices.
1.
The system and friendly name for the RTA Source.
2.
RTA Graph – 28, 1/3 octave bands, with peakhold indicators available for the tablet devices
only.
RTA Source – Selectable outputs for the RTA
Source – 14 Aux outputs, Main L/R, Talkback,
and Follow Cue.
When set to Follow Cue, the RTA displays the
audio present on the Cue mix. Whatever is being
heard on the Cue headphones will be displayed
on the RTA.
Source Master channel – When you select an
output source from the main RTA screen, the
master controls for the output bus are available.
3.
4.
1001108-01-F
Press
RTA
RTA
102
Scenes
Touch
Scenes
Scenes provide the ability to store and recall all mix
parameters.
1.
Current Scene – Displays the name of the
most recently recalled scene.
Scene:
Default
OR
Menu
OR
Touch Menu
Touch
Scenes
Scenes
2.
Save / Save As button – Displays
a page with options for naming a scene and
2
1
selecting internal or USB storage.
3. Factory scenes list – A library of
preset scenes representing mixer settings for a
3
5
4
variety of bands, productions and styles. Factory
memory is read-only.
4. Mixer scenes list – Displays a list of
scenes that have been saved to the mixer’s
internal memory.
5. USB list – Displays a list of scenes that
have been saved to an attached USB memory.
device.
6. Copy to USB – Copies the selected scene
from Internal memory to an attached USB
6
7
8
8
memory device.
7. Copy to Mixer – Copies the selected
9
scene from an attached USB memory device to
Internal memory.
10
10a
10b
10c
8. Delete – Deletes the selected Internal or
External scene.
9. Recall – Recalls the selected Scene.
10. Recall Options – Scenes are saved with all parameters but it isn’t always desireable to recall all parameters. This section can be
set so that some mixer settings are not effected by a scene recall.
a. Omit Levels – Mix levels including Aux sends, FX sends and Output levels are uneffected.
b. Omit Outputs – Output EQ, Anti-Feedback, Comp/Limiter are uneffected.
c. Omit Routing – Sub Group and Main L/R assignments are uneffected.
IMPORTANT!: It is possible to recall TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 scenes on a TouchMix-30 Pro. Of course the
TouchMix-30 Pro has far more inputs and outputs. These excess inputs and outputs will be set to factory default values.
1001108-01-F
103
Channel Safe
Channel Safe prevents channel settings from being
changed when a Scene is recalled. You can set the
Channel Safe property for inputs on an Input Channel’s
Setup screen, and for outputs on an Output Channel’s
Setup screen. The Channel Safe screen provides the
capability of setting multiple channels to safe in one
place.
1.
2.
3.
Clear Safe Channels – Touch this button
to remove the Channel Safe from all channels.
Inputs – Touch each Input channel you wish
to keep safe.
Outputs – Touch each Output channel you
wish to keep safe.
Press
Menu
Menu
Channel
Safe
Touch Channel Safe
FX
Main Mix
Scene:
Channel Safe
L/R
Default
1
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 1
Select Channels to Safe during Scene Recall
Clear Safe Channels
Main
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Inputs
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
USB
Joe’s
Vocal
In 2
In 3
In 4
In 5
In 6
In 7
In 8
2-Trk PB
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
In 9
In 10
In 11
In 12
In 13
In 14
In 15
In 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Cue
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
Main
L/R
Aux 5
Aux 6
10
Aux 6
5
Aux 7
25/26
27/28
29/30
Aux 8
L
u
F
Aux 7
In 17
In 18
In 19
In 20
In 21
In 22
In 23
Stereo In
25/26
In 24
Stereo In Stereo In
29/30
27/28
5
Aux 8
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
20
0
Aux 10
3
Outputs
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 14
Joe’s
Monitor
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 11
Aux 12
40
∞
Aux 12
L/R
Aux 13
Aux 13
Main
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
104
Auto Mixer TouchMix-30 Pro
Automatic Microphone Mixer (TouchMix-30 only)
Menu
Auto-Mixer
Description
An Automatic Microphone Mixer (Auto-Mixer) works by
comparing the signal levels of the assigned channels and
applying an algorithm that determines which talker (or
talkers) is (are) currently speaking. The Auto-Mixer then
sends a control command to the channels that allocates
more gain to the channels with an active talker and less to
the channels with an inactive talker. As a result feedback
and extraneous noise (such as paper rustling from
panelists or HVAC) are reduced. The Auto-Mixer simply
rides gain on the assigned channels. It does not have any
effect on signal routing. The Auto-Mixer will affect any
Aux mixes that are assigned post-fader but will not affect
pre-fader Aux sends.
Auto-Mixers are most commonly used for speech
applications such as conferences, presentations or
panel discussions in which there are multiple talkers and
multiple microphones. They also may be used in theatrical
sound reinforcement. Auto-Mixers are not intended to mix
entire bands although they have been used successfully
on horn sections and backing vocal ensembles.
The TouchMix-30 Automatic Microphone Mixer (Auto-Mixer)
is a gain sharing design that is available for all 24 mic/line
input channels. There are two independent Auto-Mixers.
Menu
Auto
Mixer
1
2
3
5
4
6
Accessing the Auto-Mixer
To access the Auto-Mixer: Menu > Auto-Mixer
It may be convenient to assign a User Button to the Auto-Mixer.
To assign a User Button to the Auto-Mixer: Menu > User Buttons > Select a button from User 1 – 8
1. In the Action panel, select Go To Screen
2. In the Selection panel, select Other
3. In the Detail panel, select Auto-Mix
4. Touch the Assign button
Auto-Mixer Controls and Indicators
The Auto-Mixer Home Screen maintains the mixer’s usual channel paradigm. Cue and Mute buttons function normally. The channel fader is
shortened to allow room for Auto-Mixer controls. Controls are:
1. Auto-Mix – Enables (blue) or disables (gray) Auto-Mix for the channel. When disabled, the channel functions normally.
2. 1 and 2 – Two independent Auto-Mixers are available. These controls assign the channel to Auto-Mix group Auto-Mix 1 or Auto‑Mix 2.
A blue button indicates the group to which the channel is assigned.
3. Sensitivity – Adjusts the sensitivity of the channel to compensate for loud or soft spoken talkers.
4. Auto-Mix 1 and Auto-Mix 2 switches –
a. Out (gray) disables the Auto-Mixer
b. In (blue) enables the Auto-Mixer
5. Maximum Attenuation – Sets the maximum attenuation that the Auto-Mixer will apply to the channels. For most applications
this should be left at its default value of 60 dB. But there may be circumstances in which it is desirable to limit how much attenuation the
Auto-Mixer will apply.
6. Metering Mode – There are two metering modes for the Auto-Mixer.
a. Gain Only – Displays a meter that indicates the total gain applied to the channel by the fader and the Auto-Mixer. The Gain meter is inactive
when the associated channel is not assigned to the Auto-Mixer.
b. Level & Gain – Simultaneously displays the standard (green, yellow, red) channel signal-level meter on the left, and the Gain meter on the
right (blue meter).
1001108-01-F
105
External Control Surfaces - TouchMix-30 Pro
The TouchMix-30 Pro includes the capability to interface with third party control surfaces with motorized faders. QSC has verified operation with the
following control surfaces. Refer to the documentation delivered with the control surface, or the company’s website for connection and operation.
•
iCon Platform M+ – This controller offers the best match of features to the requirements of controlling the TouchMix-30 Pro and is
recommended.
•
Behringer XTouch Compact – Lacks some useful controls but is useable.
•
PreSonus FaderPort 8 – There are only eight faders so the master fader for the selected mix is not available on the control surface.
All control of mixer outputs must be done on the TouchMix-30 Pro screen or app.
•
Other Control Surfaces – Other current or discontinued control surfaces using MCP (Mackie Control Protocol) may work but QSC
cannot provide any assistance for these devices.
Channel Strip View
With physical faders in use, it is no longer necessary to
display the graphic faders on the mixer or tablet screen. The
channel strip view replaces the on-screen faders. There are
two ways to display the Channel Strip view.
Press
Menu
Menu
Press
External
Faders
External
Faders
The channel strips present controls and indicators for the
channels in the selected fader Bank.
11. Channel Name / Select – Displays
the user‑defined channel name and, when touched,
displays one of the processing pages.
1
2
22. Pan – Indicates and controls placement of the
channel in the stereo sound field.
3
33. EQ – Displays a graphic representation of the
channel’s EQ setting. Touch the image to go to the
4
5
channel’s EQ page.
44. Track – Selects a recorded track (USB multi6
track or DAW depending on the Recording Mode
11
7
setting) as the source for the channel.
8
55. Arm – If USB multi-track is selected as the
recording mode, this control arms / disarms the
9
track for recording.
10
66. Comp – Indicates whether the compressor is
engaged / disengaged. Touch to navigate to the
compressor screen. The meter to the right displays
compressor activity.
77. Gate – Indicates whether the gate is engaged / disengaged. Touch to navigate to the gate screen. The meter to the right displays gate
activity.
88. 48V – Engages / disengages phantom power for the channel.
99. Meter – Indicates channel signal level.
10. Assignments – Indicates assignment to Main L/R and Sub Groups 8 – 1.
1111 Anti-FB (output channels only) – Navigates to the Anti-feedback filters screen.
1001108-01-F
106
Custom Fader Banks - TouchMix30- Pro
The TouchMix30- Pro mixer supports 3 Custom Fader
banks. By default, the custom fader bank assignments are
identical to the standard input fader banks – Inputs 8-1,
Inputs 16-9 and Inputs 24-17. The customized banks are
saved as part of the scene.
Menu
Press
Custom
Banks
Press
Menu
Custom
Banks
1
Set up the Custom Fader Banks
2
5
Press Menu > Custom Banks. The custom banks screen
displays.
3
11. Press one of the Custom Bank tabs (1) to edit.
22. Use the Name field (2) to give the bank a custom
name. This name displays in the Custom Bank
tab (1). The characters you can use as the name
are restricted to standard letters on the English
(US) keyboard. If you select a restricted character,
the following message displays.
Invalid character(s) detected. Please use standard keys
on the English (US) keyboard, and omit the following
chararacters: \ $ % ~ < > ? , ; @ # * | : « € £ ¥
4
OK
33. Each bank has eight Channel faders (3). Select a
Channel fader button.
44. Select a channel (4) to assign to the selected
Channel fader (3). Any of the following chanels
(4) may be assigned to the selected Channel
fader: Inputs, Aux Masters, FX Returns, Sub Group
Masters or DCA Group Masters. These channels may be assigned in any order.
IMPORTANT!: The assignment is effective immediately.
55. Press the Reset button to return all three Custom Banks to their default assignments.
1001108-01-F
107
DCA Group Assignments
Press
Home
DCA Groups are used to vary the gain of several
channels at once from a single fader without changing
the position of the channel faders. DCA groups also
include a mute function.
NOTE: DCA Groups may also be
accessed by touching Menu > DCA
Groups.
Touch
DCA Groups
Touch a
DCA
DCA Groups
Main Mix
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
FX
DCA 1
Inputs 1-8
1
Scene:
My DCA
2
Aux 1
DCA 2
DCA 3
DCA 4
DCA 5
DCA 6
DCA 7
DCA 8
3
My DCA
Default
Prev
Aux 3
About DCA Groups
•
•
1.
2.
When a channel is in one or more DCA Groups,
the output of that channel is equal to the sum of
the DCA fader settings and channel fader settings.
When a channel is in one or more DCA Groups,
the channel and all the DCA Groups must be
unmuted for audio to pass. The same rule applies
when a channel is in a DCA, and Mute Group – all
must be unmuted for audio to pass.
DCA Select button – Selects the
associated DCA group for editing.
Aux 3
25/26
Inputs
4
1
Aux 4
Aux 4
In 1
5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
In 2
In 3
In 4
In 5
In 6
In 7
In 8
In 9
In 10
In 11
In 12
27/28
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
In 13
In 14
In 15
In 16
In 17
In 18
In 19
In 20
In 21
In 22
In 23
In 24
Stereo In
29/30
Aux 7
Aux 8
10
5
L
u
F
Aux 7
Aux 8
Main
L/R
29/30
Aux 6
Aux 6
Cue
Stereo In
25/26
Stereo In
27/28
Aux 5
Aux 5
Main
Clear Assignments
Aux 2
Aux 2
Next
5
Outputs
10
Aux 9
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 14
Joe’s
Monitor
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 14
FX 1
FX 2
FX 3
FX 4
FX 5
FX 6
USB
FX 1
FX 2
FX 3
FX 4
FX 5
FX 6
2-Trk PB
Aux 9
Aux 10
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Aux 12
40
∞
Aux 12
User-defined name field – Touch the
6
name field to display a keyboard that may be
used to enter a name for the DCA Group.
Clear Assignments button – Clears all assignments from the selected DCA Group.
DCA system name label – This name does not change.
Assignment buttons – Touch one of the channel Assignment buttons to add the channel to the selected DCA Group. Inputs,
outputs and FX returns may be assigned to DCA Groups.
Main muted – The orange color of the mute button indicates that the channel is muted from a group, such as DCA or Mute Groups.
L/R
Aux 13
Aux 13
Main
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
3.
4.
5.
6.
1001108-01-F
108
MIDI
The MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) Setup
provides the means to use a “class compliant” USB MIDI
foot switch to control many functions of the TouchMix
mixer. This screen is not available on remote devices.
QSC has verified proper operation with these USB MIDI
foot-switches: iCON G-BOARD and Logidy UMI3
1.
MIDI Functions – The current MIDI
assignments are displayed on MIDI buttons 1 – 8.
Blue indicates the MIDI function is selected and
can be assigned/unassigned or renamed.
MIDI
Menu
Main Mix
1
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
NOTE: Only On/Off commands are
supported. The mixer does not respond to
continuous controller data.
Aux 1
2
MIDI 1
MIDI 2
MIDI 3
MIDI 4
MIDI 5
MIDI 6
MIDI 7
MIDI 8
Drums
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Name
Drums
3
Drums
Assign
4
Scene:
Default
Main
Unassign
Aux 2
Aux 2
Cue
Aux 3
5
Aux 3
Action
6
Selection
7
Detail
Aux 4
Recall Input Preset
Factory
Default
Aux 4
Recall Output Preset
User
Horn Band
Aux 5
Recall Scene
Relative
Rock Band
Aux 5
Mute
Country
Aux 6
Go to Screen
Drum Sub Mix
Aux 6
Recording
Jazz Quintet
Select
Rock Band 1
L
Utility
Rock Band 2
F
Aux 7
Aux 7
2.
Touch MIDI
Setup
Press Menu
Main
L/R
10
5
Songwriter
Name – Displays the name of the currently
assigned MIDI function. A name is automatically
assigned when a function is selected in the
Action, Selection, Detail fields.
Assign button – After making your
selection, touch this button to assign your
selection to the selected MIDI.
Unassign – Touch this button to remove the
8
9
assignment to the selected MIDI button.
Action – This list is a general list of types of
things the MIDI controller can affect. For example “Recall Scene”.
Selection – When an Action is chosen, a list of ways the action can be applied are displayed. For example “Factory”.
Detail – Displays a list of specific targets for the selection. For example “Drum Sub Mix”.
MIDI Assignment – The name of the assignment made internally to the USB MIDI device button.
Learn MIDI –
u
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
Aux 10
20
0
Aux 10
3.
Aux 11
Aux 11
40
Aux 12
∞
Aux 12
4.
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
MIDI Assignment
No MIDI Assignment
Aux 14
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
a. Touch this button to teach the TouchMix what MIDI command should trigger the selected action.
b.
A message displays saying, “Waiting for incoming MIDI message...”
c.
Press a button on the USB MIDI device.
d.
When the USB MIDI device button is pressed, the TouchMix responds by executing the assigned function.
1001108-01-F
109
Learn MIDI
Mute
Talkback / Noise
This screen controls the routing and level of Talkback
and Noise.
1.
Reset button – Restores factory defaults
for the Talkback / Noise Generator.
2.
Assignment buttons – Select the
destination for the noise or talkback signals.
Note that it is possible to route talkback to the
FX devices. This is very useful when auditioning
and selecting effects.
Talkback (Measurement) Mic –
Adjusts the level of the talkback signal to the
assigned outputs. -Inf (Infinity) is off.
Enable (Talkback) – Touch to enable
Talkback, touch again to disable Talkback. Unlike
the mixer’s hold-to-talk Talk button, this button
is latching. When enabled, the hold-to-talk
button is illuminated. On tablet devices, both Talk
and Enable are latching.
Mic Phantom – Enables 48V phantom
power to the Talkback microphone input.
Noise Generator – Adjusts the level
of the noise signal to the assigned outputs.
-Inf (Infinity) is off.
Enable (Noise) – Touch to enable Noise,
touch again to disable Noise.
Touch
Talkback
Press Menu
FX
Talkback
Menu
Main Mix
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1001108-01-F
Scene:
Talkback / Noise Generator
L/R
Default
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 1
1
Select outputs for Talkback/Noise Generator
Reset
Aux 2
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 14
Joe’s
Monitor
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 14
FX 1
FX 2
FX 3
FX 4
FX 5
FX 6
FX 1
FX 2
FX 3
FX 4
FX 5
FX 6
2
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
2
2
Main
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
Aux 9
Talkback
(Measurement)
Mic
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 10
Noise
Generator
-40.0
Aux 11
-40.0
3
Aux 11
6
Mic
Phantom
Aux 12
Aux 12
4
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Aux 14
110
Enable
5
48V
L/R
7
Enable
TouchMix Wi-Fi Control
Manage the mixer’s wireless or wired network. Connect an iPad, or iPhone (iOS 6 or later) or Android device (5.0 or later). The network
configuration can only be performed on the TouchMix.
Before You Begin
For smaller spaces with fewer potential sources of interference, a USB Wi-Fi Adapter such as that supplied with the TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16
will work well. But USB adapters are going to have less range than external routers due to their lower-powered transmitters and tiny, less efficient
antennas. In a larger space with more potential interference and more mission-critical remote control requirements it’s better to have a higherpowered device with more efficient antennas. That’s why there is no USB Wi-Fi Adapter included with the TouchMix-30 Pro – it’s likely to be used in
more demanding applications and an external Wi-Fi router is the best solution. That said, the TouchMix-30 Pro will work with the QSC-supplied USB
Wi-Fi adapter marked with an “N”. It is available here https://parts.qsc.com/cp-000033-00 . But be aware that its range and connection reliability
will be inferior to most external routers.
TouchMix mixers support multiple ways of connecting to your wireless devices.
Wi-Fi Router Access Point
In this implementation, a Wi-Fi router wired to the mixer provides the access point to the mixer. The TouchMix-30 Pro connects directly to the router
using CAT5 cable. TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 require an inexpensive USB to Ethernet adapter – for more information see https://
www.qsc.com/live-sound/resources/software-and-firmware/touchmix/ethernet/.
•
Advantages – Simple to set up. Good range and robust connection (depending on the Wi-Fi router). External routers will have higher
power and far better antennae compared to a USB adapter. Many of them will also be able to operate in the less crowded 5 GHz
channels. If the router has an Internet connection, it can alert you to and download firmware updates.
•
Disadvantages – One more piece of gear to carry and connect.
Setting it up
Unless you are skilled in digital network configuration, do not use a router with non-standard, custom settings. If using a multi-port router, do not
connect the mixer to the Internet port (the Internet jack will usually be a different color than the other ports).
To Setup Network:
Menu
Network
1.
Mixer Name = Enter a mixer name
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Network Type = Wired
Wired Network Settings = Auto IP Address (DHCP)
If the router is powered and properly connected, Connection Status = Connected
Touch Apply
The mixer configures the network and a message “Wired Ethernet connection operational” displays.
Touch Okay
Your devices will now connect to the mixer via the router using the router’s SSID (router name) and password.
Connecting to a Facility’s Network
Networks in commercial facilities have been set up by IT professionals who are concerned about security. They may be very reluctant to allow you
to connect a mixer to their network. But if they do, they will want to know two things.
What port do you want them to give you? Answer – any open port will work. The mixer will find it.
What services do you need? Answer – none. The mixer implements zero-configuration networking using Bonjour®.
1001108-01-F
111
Wireless Network Setup: Create New Network
IMPORTANT!: USB Wi-Fi adapter
(QSC Part # cp-000033-00)
Create New Network using a USB Wi-Fi
dongle provides short range wireless communication
between the TouchMix mixer and Android and/or iOS
devices with the TouchMix app installed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mixer Name: – Enter a name for the
network.
Network Type: – Set to Wireless.
Select Create New Network.
Set Network Password: – Enter a tendigit (numerical) password.
Apply – Touch to configure the network.
The network is ready for use. External devices
may now login to the mixer using the Mixer
Name and Password.
Touch
Network
Press Menu
Menu
Network
Touch
Wireless
Wireless
Main Mix
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 1
Scene:
Network Setup
Mixer Name:
Default
1
2
Network Type:
My TM-30
Wireless
Wired
Main
Aux 2
Aux 2
Wireless Network Settings
Aux 3
Aux 3
3
Connect to Existing Network
Aux 4
Cue
Create New Network
Aux 4
Main
Aux 5
L/R
Aux 5
Aux 6
10
Aux 6
5
Aux 7
Set Password:
Aux 7
4
L
0123456789
u
AF
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
40
Aux 12
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Apply
Aux 14
1001108-01-F
112
5
Mute
Wireless Network Setup: Connect to Existing Network
IMPORTANT!: Requires an Ethernet
Wi-Fi router and the USB Wi-Fi adapter
(QSC Part # cp-000033-00).
Connecting to an Existing Network
using a USB Wi-Fi dongle provides short range wireless
communication between a TouchMix mixer and a longer
range wireless Ethernet router. The Android and/or iOS
devices with the TouchMix app installed communicate
with the TouchMix via the Ethernet wireless router.
1.
Mixer Name: – Enter a name for the mixer.
2.
3.
Network Type: – Set to Wireless.
Select Connect to Existing
Network.
Network SSID: – Enter a known SSID
of an Ethernet wireless router, or touch Scan.
Select the desired network from the list that
displays.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Scan – The mixer searches for, and displays,
a list of available wireless networks. Select the
desired network.
Password: – Enter the password for the
network being joined.
Security: – Select the Security setting used
by the network.
Apply – Touch to configure the mixer. External
devices may now log on to the mixer using the
external network Name and Password.
Touch
Network
Press Menu
Menu
Network
Touch
Wireless
Wireless
Main Mix
L/R
Scene:
Network Setup
Default
1
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 1
Mixer Name:
2
Network Type:
My TM-30
Wireless
Wired
Main
Aux 2
Aux 2
Wireless Network Settings
Aux 3
3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Connect to Existing Network
Cue
Create New Network
Aux 4
Main
Aux 5
Aux 5
Network SSID:
Aux 6
4
External Router
5
L/R
Scan
10
Aux 6
5
Aux 7
Password:
Aux 7
6
L
Password
u
AF
Aux 8
5
7
Aux 8
Aux 9
Security
10
WPA
(AES+TKIP)
WEP-40
Aux 9
WPA2
(CCMP)
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
40
Signal Strength:
Aux 12
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Apply
8
Mute
Aux 14
Select a Network:
Found Networks
Wireless ABC
Joe’s Network
TM-30 - practice only
Select
1001108-01-F
20
0
Aux 10
113
Cancel
Wired Network Setup: Static IP Address
IMPORTANT!: For
TouchMix-30 Pro, connect an Ethernet
router to the mixer’s RJ45 jack.
For TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16
connect a compatible USB to Ethernet
adapter to the mixer’s USB port. (for
compatible adapters, visit qsc.com and
search for “Ethernet”.
Press Menu
Menu
Network
Touch
Network
Touch Wired
Wired
Main Mix
L/R
Default
1
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 1
Scene:
Network Setup
2
Mixer Name:
My TM-30
Network Type:
Wireless
Wired
Main
Aux 2
Aux 2
Wired Network Settings
Aux 3
Using a Wired Network Setup with
a Static IP Address provides wired
communications between a TouchMix and a wireless
Ethernet router. Make sure there is no other equipment
connected to the same network with the same IP
address.
1.
Mixer Name: – Enter a name for the
network.
2.
Network Type: – Set to Wired.
Select Static IP Address to use a static
IP address for the mixer.
Enter the Network Address for the
mixer.
Enter the Network Mask
Enter the Gateway Address
Connection Status:
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3
Aux 3
Static IP Address
Aux 4
Cue
Auto IP Address (DHCP)
Aux 4
Main
Aux 5
Aux 5
Network Address:
Aux 6
L/R
4
192.168.1.112
10
Aux 6
5
Aux 7
Network Mask:
Aux 7
L
5
255.255.255.0
u
AF
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
Aux 9
Gateway Address:
10
6
192.168.1.254
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Connection Status:
Aux 12
7
40
Connected
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Apply
8
Mute
Aux 14
a. Connected – Displays to confirm successful connection to the network. External devices may now login to the mixer using the external
network Name and Password.
b.
8.
No Cable Detected – Mixer is not connected to a network.
Apply – Touch apply and the mixer will configure the network connections. .
1001108-01-F
114
Wired Network Setup: Auto IP Address (DHCP)
IMPORTANT!: For
TouchMix-30 Pro, connect an Ethernet
router to the mixer’s RJ45 jack.
For TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16
connect a compatible USB to Ethernet
adapter to the mixer’s USB port. (for
compatible adapters, visit qsc.com and
search for “Ethernet”.
Press Menu
Menu
Network
L/R
Aux 1
1
a. Connected – Displays to confirm
successful connection to the network. External
devices may now login to the mixer using the
external network Name and Password.
b.
5.
Mixer Name:
Network Type:
Wireless
Wired
Main
Wired Network Settings
Static IP Address
Aux 4
Auto IP Address (DHCP)
Cue
3
Aux 4
Main
Aux 5
L/R
Aux 5
Aux 6
10
5
Aux 7
Assigned IP Address:
L
4
192.168.1.112
u
AF
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Connection Status:
Aux 12
5
40
No Cable Detected
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Apply
Aux 14
No Cable Detected – Mixer is not connected to a network.
Apply – Touch apply and the mixer will configure the network connections.
1001108-01-F
2
My TM-30
Aux 3
Aux 7
4.
Default
Aux 3
1.
3.
Scene:
Network Setup
Aux 2
Aux 6
2.
Wired
Aux 2
Mixer Name: – Enter a name for the network.
Network Type: – Set to Wired.
Select Auto IP Address (DHCP) to set
the IP Address automatically.
The mixer searches for an IP address from the
network and enters it in the Assigned IP
Address field.
Connection Status:
Touch Wired
Main Mix
Joe’s Monitor
Using a Wired Network Setup with a
Auto IP Address (DHCP) provides wired
communications between a TouchMix and a wireless
Ethernet router. The DHCP provides an unused IP
address for the TouchMix. It may be different each time
you connect to the network.
Touch
Network
115
6
Mute
TouchMix-30 Pro Phones and Monitor
Press Phones OR Press Monitor
Phones and Monitor Level Control and Monitor settings.
NOTE: By default, no audio signal is
sent to the Phones / Monitor Outputs. To send audio channel signals
(including Main L/R) to the Phones / Monitor Outputs. Enable the Cue
button for the channels you want to listen to.
Monitor
Phones
Phones
Monitor
1
1
Source
10
10
Phones Level
1.
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 14
Main LR
Cue
5
5
U
Phones / Cue Level – Controls the level of the signal on the Phones
outputs.
-10
-10
-20
-20
Monitor Level and Settings
Source (Monitor) – Select the source you want to send to the Monitor output.
2.
3.
In – Engages / bypasses the delay.
4.
0.00 ms
0.00 m
3
Close
-40
0.00 feet
In
Delay – The delay is used to align the audio coming from a distant stage with
the near-field monitor signal heard at the mixer position. Digital readouts are in
feet, milliseconds, and meters.
Adjust the output level for the Monitor.
4
Close
TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 Phones
and TouchMix-16 Monitor
Press Phones OR Press Monitor
Phones
Controls the output level for the Phones Cue and Monitor Cue
NOTE: The Monitor Level control is available only on the TouchMix-16.
1
Phones (1) and Monitor (2) Level – Controls the level of the Cue signal on the
Phones and Monitor outputs.
NOTE: By default, no audio signal is sent to the Phones / Monitor Outputs. To
send audio channel signals (including Main LR) to the Phones / Monitor Outputs.
Enable the Cue button for the channels you want to listen to.
1001108-01-F
Delay
2
-40
1.
U
-5
-5
116
2
Monitor
Recording Setup – Multitrack USB
Press
Recall, initiate, and manage Multitrack recording
sessions. Scroll down for Recalling a session.
1.
Current Session – Displays the name of
the currently active session.
2.
New Session –
NOTE: When a new session is created,
it is made the “Current Session”.
Touch
Recording
Mode
Rec /
Play
Recording
Mode
Rec /
Play
Touch
Multitrack
USB Drive
Recording
Setup
Multitrack
USB Drive
Touch
Recording
Setup
New Session
OR
Touch New
Session
OR
Touch
Rename
Rename
Main Mix
Scene:
Recording Setup
L/R
Joe’s Monitor
1
Current Session
Aux 1
Default
DEFAULT
3b
Rename
2a
Main
New Session
Aux 2
Aux 2
Cue
Aux 3
a. New Session button – Touch to start
creating a new session.
b.
New Session Name dialog – Touch the
edit field to enter a name for the new session.
Aux 3
USB Sessions
Aux 4
3a
Aux 4
Aux 5
DEFAULT
JOE SONG 1
Main
L/R
Aux 5
Aux 6
10
Aux 6
5
NOTE: You cannot create a new
session named “DEFAULT” or rename
“DEFAULT”.
Aux 7
L
Aux 7
F
5
Aux 8
10
Aux 9
Aux 9
3.
Create button – Touch to create (save) the
New Session.
A dialog displays asking if you want to create a
new session named “<your session name>”.
Touch Yes to create, or Cancel.
Rename –
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
40
Aux 12
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Aux 14
a. In the USB Sessions list, select the session you
want to rename.
b.
Rename button – Touch to change the name
of the selected session.
c.
Rename Current Session To:
dialog – Touch the edit field to rename the
selected session.
d.
Rename button – Touch to save the renamed session.
Rename Current Session To:
New Session Name
2b
3c
DEFAULT
2c
Session rename
3d
Create
To return to the main Record / Play screen, press Rec/Play.
1001108-01-F
20
0
Aux 10
c.
u
Aux 8
117
Cancel
Rename
Cancel
Recall Session – Multitrack USB
Recalling a Multitrack USB session tells the mixer
to record in an existing recording file structure on
the inserted USB drive. Each time recordings starts
and stops, a .wav file is created in any subdirectory
associated with armed tracks.
Touch
Recording
Mode
Press Rec
/ Play
Recalls multi-track sessions from a USB drive.
Rec /
Play
Recording
Mode
Touch
Multitrack
USB Drive
Recording
Setup
Multitrack
USB Drive
Main Mix
L/R
Touch
Recording
Setup
Scene:
Default
Recording Setup
Joe’s Monitor
IMPORTANT!: Formatting the USB
drive will remove all data on the drive.
Aux 1
Current Session
DEFAULT
Cue
1
Aux 3
USB Sessions – Displays a list of all USB
recording sessions on the USB drive in the Mixer
USB port. Touch a USB session name to recall.
Main
New Session
Aux 2
Aux 3
1.
Rename
Aux 2
USB Sessions
DEFAULT
Aux 4
JOE SONG 1
Aux 4
Main
Aux 5
L/R
Aux 5
Aux 6
2.
Record Pick_Off –
•
Pre – Recorded audio is not affected by the
dynamics or EQ processors.
10
Aux 6
5
Aux 7
L
Aux 7
F
u
Aux 8
5
Aux 8
10
• Post – Recorded audio is affected by the
dynamics and EQ processors.
3.
4.
Format USB Drive – Formats the
currently installed USB drive in the Mixer’s USB
port.
Recall – Touch to recall the selected USB
Session.
To return to the main Record / Play screen, press Rec/Play
1001108-01-F
Aux 9
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
40
Aux 12
4
Aux 12
∞
Recall
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Record Pick-Off
Aux 14
118
2
Pre
Post
3
Format USB Drive
Mute
Aux Mix on Faders
Press
Home
The Aux Mix on Faders provides a view of a single Aux Mix
(or Aux Bus) with large faders. By selecting different fader
banks, you can see and adjust everything that is sent to
the selected Aux bus.
Here is an example.
1. Select fader bank Inputs 1–8 (1)
2. Select Aux 1 (2)
3. The faders you see (6) are the Aux Sends from
Input channels 1–8 going to Aux Mix 1.
4. Select FX Masters (1).
5. The faders you see are the Aux Sends from the FX
Masters going to Aux Mix 1.
6. Notice that when you select Aux Mix 1 some of the
small white faders in the fader banks are missing.
These channels are not available to the selected
Aux Mix. The channels that are not available to the
Aux Mix are the Aux channels.
Select a
Fader Bank
Select an
Aux Mix
Aux 1
Inputs 17-24
Aux 1
Inputs 1-8
Main Mix
Scene:
L/R
Default
1
Aux 1
3
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 2
In 1
In 2
In 3
In 4
In 5
In 6
In 7
In 8
Aux 1
4
Aux 3
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Aux 5
1
Aux 5
5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
2
8
Aux 7
Aux 8
Aux 8
6
Aux 9
Aux 9
TouchMix-30 Pro
Aux 10
The TouchMix-30 Pro is a little different. For Aux Mixes
1–8 it is the same as TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16.
However, if you select Aux Mix 9–14 you will notice that
Aux channels 1–8 are now available. This means that you
can send an already-mixed Aux output (any or all of Aux
Mixes 1–8) to one or more of the Aux Mixes 9–14.
Aux 11
Aux 10
7
Aux 11
Aux 12
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
Aux 14
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
9 Mute
Aux 14
TouchMix-30 Pro Auxes are doing double duty as Mix Matrices. A Mix Matrix lets the operator take existing main, auxiliary and sub group mixes and create
a new mix from them.
Summary
Here’s what can be mixed on to the Auxes:
•
Auxes 1–8: All TouchMix models – All Inputs, all Effects / TouchMix-30 Pro Only – Main L/R, all Sub Groups
•
Auxes 9–14: (TouchMix-30 Pro Only) All Inputs, all Effects, Main L/R, all Sub Groups, Auxes 1–8
NOTE: To add the Main L/R to an Aux Mix, select Aux Out 9–14 fader bank.
Control Descriptions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Fader Bank selectors – Touch a Fader Bank number to display the selected Aux Mix for the selected Fader Bank.
Aux Mix select buttons – Select an Aux Mix to display that Aux Mix for the selected Fader Bank.
Channel select and friendly name – Touch a channel selector to access all the details for that channel. You can change this
name in the channel’s Setup screen.
Cue buttons – Sends signal from the channel input to the Phones and/or Monitor outputs.
System Channel Name labels – 1 Mic, 2 Mic, and so on, do not change.
Aux Send faders – Adjusts the audio level of the selected channel to the selected Aux Mix. Color coded to match the Aux Mix
Select buttons.
Channel Input meter – Displays the pre-fader / post-compressor & gate audio level of the channel.
Aux Mix Master fader – Adjusts the overall level of the selected Aux Mix. This level includes all Aux Sends to this Aux Mix.
Changes when a different Aux Mix is selected.
Mute buttons – Mutes the Aux Send only for the associated channel.
• Orange: Indicates that the channel is muted from the Main L/R mix, a mute group or a DCA group.
•
Red: Indicates the channel is muted for the selected Aux mix.
1001108-01-F
119
Patch Matrix (TouchMix-30 Pro only)
Manages connections between physical inputs and onscreen channels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Preset – Displays the name of the current
preset. ”Default routing” is the Reset or factory
default Preset.
Save / Recall button – Navigates to the
Patch Matrix Preset screen where patch matrix
settings may be stored or recalled. Use Home to
return to the Patch Matrix screen.
Reset button – Restores the default settings.
Input select buttons – Used to select a
physical input for rerouting.
– Moves between Input groups 1–16
/
and 17–30.
Channel select buttons – Selects the Channel
to be connected to the selected Input.
Channels 17-30 and Channels
1–16 – Moves between channel groups
1–16 and 17–30.
Patch
Matrix
Menu
Main Mix
L/R
NOTE: The Patch Matrix should be
used with care. It is easy to set up
confusing routings that make
troubleshooting difficult.
Default
1
Joe’s Monitor
Aux 1
Scene:
Patch Matrix
Preset
2
Default Routing
Aux 2
3
To configure routing, select an Analog Input from the top row,
then select Destination Channels from the right column.
Save / Recall
4
Aux 2
Input
1
Input
2
Aux 3
Input
3
Input
4
Input
5
Input
6
Input
7
Input
8
Input
9
Input
10
Input
11
Input
12
Input
13
Input
14
Input
15
5
Input
16
Reset
Main
Patch Matrix
Cue
1
Kick
2
Snare
3
Hat
4
Tom
5
Tom
6
Tom
7
CH
8
CH
5
9
E Bass
10
10
Ac Guitar
11
Ac Guitar
12
Sax
13
Trombone
14
Kazoo
15
Cajone hole
16
Cajone Slap
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 4
Main
Aux 5
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 7
Aux 8
L/R
10
6
5
L
u
F
Aux 8
Aux 9
Aux 9
20
0
Aux 10
Aux 10
Aux 11
Aux 11
Using the Patch Matrix
Touch Patch
Matrix
Press Menu
Aux 12
40
∞
Aux 12
Aux 13
Aux 13
7 Channels 17-30
Aux 14
Aux 14
Mute
The image illustrates a “mult” (short for multiple connection). Perhaps the mixer operator needs to apply different channel processing to the
Acoustic Guitar for Mains and Monitors.
1.
Open the Patch Matrix.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the input the Acoustic Guitar is connected to (Input 10).
Mult the input to the second channel by touching 11 Ac Guitar. Input 10 is now feeding both channels.
Any input can be routed to any channel or any combination of channels.
When an input is re-patched, the channel name changes to include the name of the physical input. In the above example, channel 11
would become “[In 10] Ac Guitar”.
1001108-01-F
120
Copy and Paste
The TouchMix-30 Pro has a powerful but simple copy and paste function that is operated by the U7 (copy) and U8 (paste) buttons. Copy and Paste
is context sensitive so that what you are looking at is what will be copied. Only like things may be copied and pasted from and to each other. For
example, a PEQ cannot be pasted to a GEQ. The table below explains what parameters will be copied and pasted.
NOTE: The copy buffer retains the last item of each type that has been copied. If, for example a GEQ setting is copied and then a
Gate is copied, both will reside in memory. If a GEQ is displayed, Paste will recall the copied GEQ parameters. If a Gate is displayed,
Gate parameters will be pasted.
To Copy and Paste Parameters:
•
Navigate to the screen that displays the values to be copied.
•
For the TouchMix-30 Pro – Press U7, for the TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 – Press U2 (Copy)
•
Navigate to the destination screen.
•
TouchMix-30 Pro – Press U8, TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16 – Press U3 (Paste)
Let’s say you want to copy the mix that’s on Auxiliary 1 to Auxiliary 5…
Press
Home
Touch an
Aux Bank
Press
U7 / U2
Copy
Touch an
Aux Channel
Aux Out 1-8
U7
Aux 1
Inputs 1-8
U2
Touch an
Aux Channel
Press
U8 / U3
Paste
U8
Aux 5
U3
After set-up is complete, it may be useful to clear the Copy/Paste buffer. This will prevent accidentally pasting parameters during the show. To clear
the Copy / Paste memory:
Press
Menu
Touch
Copy/Paste
Menu
Copy / Paste
Touch
Yes
Yes
What is Displayed
What is Copied and Pasted
Main or Auxiliary Faders View
Fader, Mute and Pan
Input Channel Overview Tab
EQ, Compressor, Gate, FX sends, Aux Sends, Digital Gain, Delay, Group Assigns, Polarity
Input Channel EQ Tab
All channel EQ parameters
Input Channel Comp Tab
All channel Compressor parameters
Input Channel Gate Tab
All channel Gate parameters
Input Channel FX Tab
All channel FX send levels
Input Channel Aux Tab
All channel Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions
Input Channel Setup Tab
Recording Arm, Polarity, Delay, Digital Gain, Group assignments
Output Channel Overview Tab
PEQ, Limiter, FX sends, Aux Sends, Delay, Group Assigns, Polarity, Pick-Off Point (Auxes only)
Output Channel PEQ Tab
All channel PEQ parameters
Output Channel GEQ Tab
All channel GEQ parameters
Output Channel Anti-Feedback Tab
All channel Anti-feedback parameters
1001108-01-F
121
What is Displayed
What is Copied and Pasted
Output Channel Limiter Tab
All channel Limiter parameters
Output Channel FX Tab
All channel FX send levels
Output Channel Aux Tab
All channel Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions
Output Channel Setup Tab
Recording Arm, Polarity, Delay, Digital Gain, Group assignments
FX Channel Overview Tab
Current Preset, EQ, Pick-Off Point, Group Assigns, Polarity
FX Channel EQ Tab
All FX channel EQ parameters
FX Channel Preset Tab
Processor and Preset selection, FX Returns and Pans to Aux
FX Channel Aux Tab
All FX Channel Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions
Sub Group Overview Tab
PEQ, Limiter, FX sends, Aux Sends, Group Assigns
Sub Group EQ Tab
All Sub Group PEQ parameters
Sub Group Limiter Tab
All Sub Group Limiter parameters
Sub Group FX Tab
All Sub Group FX send levels
Sub Group Aux Tab
All Sub Group Auxiliary Send levels and Pan positions
1001108-01-F
122
TouchMix Dimensions
TouchMix-30 Pro
435 mm
17.1 in
428 mm
16.9 in
191 mm
7.5 in
191 mm
7.5 in
459 mm
18.1 in
1001108-01-F
123
TouchMix-8
13.1 in (333 mm)
Phones
Cue / Monitor
®
Aux 3/4
Right
Aux 1
Aux 2
2.2 in (56 mm)
Power
USB
Aux 3
Aux 4
4
Left
Main Left
Main Right
3
2
1
Phones
TouchMix-8
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
Stereo In
Stereo In
9/10
11/12
Instrument
1
2
Trim
3
Trim
4
Trim
5
Trim
6
Trim
7
Trim
Phantom
8
Trim
Trim
FX
Mute
Info
Mute
Groups
Cue/
Monitor
Wizard
Aux 3/4
U2
User
Menu
U3
0
U4
U1
Record/
Play
Press for f ine
1001108-01-F
124
User
9.6 in (245 mm)
Home
Standby
+48V
TouchMix-16
14.2 in (360 mm)
Main Right
Main Left
Aux 6
Aux 5
Aux 4
Aux 3
Aux 2
2.3 in (58 mm)
Talkback
Power
Aux 1
USB
®
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Main Left
Main Right
Talkback
TouchMix-16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Stereo In
Stereo In
Aux Out
Aux Out
Cue
Monitor
17/18
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
9/10
Phantom
+48V
Standby
Wizard
Trim
Aux
11.5 in (291 mm)
2
Trim
7/8
16
1
19/20
Info
FX
Mute
Mute
Groups
Talkback
Phones
User
0
U2
Menu
Record/
Play
Talk
125
User
U3
User
User
U1
U4
Press for f ine
1001108-01-F
Monitor
Mic
Pre
A/D
TouchMix-30: Ch 1 - 20
TouchMix-16: Ch 1 - 12
TouchMix-8: Ch 5 - 8
Digital
Gain
Input
Digital
Polarity
Φ
Delay
Low Cut
High Cut
PEQ
Gate
Comp
Gain
Gain
Pan
Pre
Side
Chain
FX Send
Post
Aux Send
(to stereo)
Pad
TouchMix-30: Ch 21 - 24
TouchMix-16: Ch 13 - 16
TouchMix-8: Ch 2 & 3
Aux Send
(to mono)
RTA
Pitch
Corrector
Mute
Mute
Post Fdr
Pre Fdr
Pre Dyn
Pre all
1 per Mixer
Assignable
Pad
Hi-Z
Pan
Post Fdr
Pre Fdr
Pre Dyn
Pre all
+48 V
Mic
Pre
Mute
Pre
Side Chain
Matrix
Mic
Pre
Pad
Hi-Z
TouchMix-8: Ch 1 & 2
Post
TouchMix-16: In 16
TouchMix-8: In 8
To Room Tuning Wizard
Record Pick-Off
(Global)
Pre
To DAW*
Pre
Cue
Patch Matrix*
USB Drive
DAW*
Post
Recording Mode*
USB Drive
DAW*
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-F
126
L
R
To Multi-Track
Cue
FX
R
Assign
Post
Trim
L
Mute
Detector In
+48 V
Trim
Mute
Logic
Aux (Even)
Digital
Gain
From DCA
Masters
Ch Fader
Over
Trim
Aux (Odd)
+48 V
Sub-Groups (even) *
nnels
Meter
Sub-Groups (odd) *
Mic/Line Input Channels
Main Outputs
TouchMix Block Diagram
Delay
Low Cut
High Cut
PEQ
Gate
A/D
TouchMix-30: Ch 25 - 28
Comp
Gain
Gain
Width
Assign
Post
SUM
Pre
SUM
Post
FX Send
Level
Mute
Pre
Aux Send (Stereo)
Level
Top Panel Jack
TouchMix-30: Ch 29 & 30
Post Fdr
Pre Fdr
Pre Dyn
Pre all
Balance
Mute
Aux Send (Mono)
TouchMix-16: Ch 17/18, 19/20
TouchMix-8: Ch 9/10, 11/12
SUM
Level
Post Fdr
Pre Fdr
Pre Dyn
Pre all
RTA
SUM
Mute
To DAW*
Pre
Record Pick-Off
(Global)
Patch Matrix*
Post
USB Drive
DAW*
USB Drive
DAW*
Recording Mode*
USB Drive
Pre
Cue
Post
DAW*
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-F
127
R
Mute
Detector In
Digital
L
Cue
L
R
To Multi-Track
Input
FX
Mute
Logic
Aux (Even)
A/D
Digital
Gain
From DCA Masters
Aux (Odd)
Ch Fader
Over
Sub-Groups (even) *
Meter
Sub-Groups (odd) *
Main Outputs
Stereo Input Channels
L
R
To Multi-Track
Cue
FX
Aux (Even)
Aux (Odd)
R
Sub-Groups (even) *
L
Sub-Groups (odd) *
Main Outputs
Main Output
Main Fader
Limiter
User EQ
GEQ
Room
Tuning
GEQ
Room Tuning
Wizard
Meter
Speaker
Preset
PEQ
Anti
Feedback
Low Cut
High Cut
Delay
Feedback
Wizard
SUM
RTA
Cue
To Stereo Mode Auxes (Odd/R)
To Stereo Mode Auxes (Odd/L)
Balance
To Mono Mode Auxes
Aux. Level
(9 - 14)
SUM
TouchMix-30 Only
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-F
D/A
Mute
Main Right
Record
Pick-Off
Pre
Post
Gain
Gain
Main Left
D/A
From
TouchMix-30: Talkback In
TouchMix-16: In 16
TouchMix-8: In 8
Cue
2-Track Record
Level
From DCA Masters
128
L
R
To Multi-Track
Cue
FX
Aux (Even)
Aux (Odd)
R
Sub-Groups (even) *
L
Sub-Groups (odd) *
Main Outputs
Stereo Auxiliary Output
Main Fader
Limiter
User EQ
GEQ
Room
Tuning
GEQ
Room Tuning
Wizard
From DCA Masters
Meter
Speaker
Preset
PEQ
Anti
Feedback
Low Cut
High Cut
Delay
Gain
Gain
Odd
D/A
Mute
D/A
From
TouchMix-30: Talkback In
TouchMix-16: In 16
TouchMix-8: In 8
Feedback
Wizard
Even
Cue
2-Track Record
Level
Record
Pick-Off
Pre
SUM
Post
RTA
L
D/A
R
D/A
TouchMix-16 Only
Auxes 7/8 & 9/10
Cue
Aux Level
Aux Out
(Odd)
Main L/R
D/A
TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16
To Stereo Mode Auxes (Odd/R)
To Stereo Mode Auxes (Odd/L)
Aux Out
(Even)
Balance
To Mono Mode Auxes
Aux. Level
(9 - 14)
D/A
SUM
TouchMix-30 Only
TouchMix-30 Auxes 11/12 & 13/14
TouchMix-8 Auxes 3/4
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-F
129
L
R
To Multi-Track
Cue
FX
Aux (Even)
Aux (Odd)
R
Sub-Groups (even) *
L
Sub-Groups (odd) *
Main Outputs
Mono Auxiliary Output
Main Fader
Limiter
User EQ
GEQ
Room
Tuning
GEQ
Room Tuning
Wizard
Main Left
Speaker
Preset
PEQ
From
TouchMix-30: Talkback In
TouchMix-16: In 16
TouchMix-8: In 8
Anti
Feedback
Low Cut
High Cut
Delay
Feedback
Wizard
RTA
Cue
Aux Level
Odd Auxes
Even Auxes
TouchMix-8 and TouchMix-16
To Stereo Mode Auxes (Odd/L)
To Stereo Mode Auxes (Odd/R)
Pan
Aux
Level
To Mono Mode Auxes
TouchMix-30 Only, Auxes 1 - 8
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-F
From DCA Masters
130
Main L/R
Gain
Gain
Mute
D/A
PEQ
Comp
Low Cut
High Cut
Gain
Gain
Width
Mute
Assign
RTA
Post
SUM
SUM
SUM
FX Send
Mute
Pre
Aux Send (Stereo)
Post Fdr
Pre Fdr
Pre Dyn
Pre all
Pan
Mute
Pan
Mute
Aux Send (Mono)
Post Fdr
Pre Fdr
Pre Dyn
Pre all
SUM
Mute
Pre
Cue
Post
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-F
131
Cue
L
R
To Multi-Track
R
FX
L
Aux (Even)
Mute
Logic
Aux (Odd)
From DCA Masters
Sub-Groups (even) *
Meter
Ch Fader
Sub-Groups (odd) *
Main Outputs
Stereo Sub Group (TouchMix-30 only)
PEQ
Limiter
Low Cut
High Cut
Gain
Gain
Mute
Pan
Assign
RTA
Post
FX Send
Mute
Pre
Aux Send (Stereo)
Pan
Mute
Post Fdr
Pre Fdr
Pre Dyn
Pre all
Aux Send (Mono)
Mute
Post Fdr
Pre Fdr
Pre Dyn
Pre all
Pre
Cue
Post
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-F
132
Cue
L
R
To Multi-Track
R
FX
L
Aux (Even)
Mute
Logic
Aux (Odd)
From DCA Masters
Sub-Groups (even) *
Meter
Ch Fader
Sub-Groups (odd) *
Main Outputs
Mono Sub Group (TouchMix-30 only)
L
R
To Multi-Track
Cue
FX
Aux (Even)
Aux (Odd)
R
Sub-Groups (even) *
L
Sub-Groups (odd) *
Main Outputs
Cue, Monitor, Talkback, Noise
Monitor Source *
-Aux
-Main L/R
-Cue
Monitor
Level
D/A
Delay
Monitor
D/A
TouchMix-30 only
Monitor
Monitor Level
D/A
D/A
TouchMix-16 only
Phones
Phones Level
Noise
Generator
D/A
D/A
Noise Level
Enable
Talk Level
Enable
To RTA &
Room Tuning*
+48 V *
Main
Mic
Pre
Talkback In
A/D
TouchMix-16 & TouchMix-30 only
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-F
133
Aux es
FX
Low Cut
PEQ
Gain
Gain
Balance
R
Mute
Assign
SUM
RTA
Aux Send (Stereo)
Balance
Mute
Aux Send (Mono, Odd Auxes)
Mute
SUM
Aux Send (Mono, Even Auxes)
Mute
SUM
Pre
Cue
Post
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-F
134
Cue
L
R
To Multi-Track
L
FX
Mute
Logic
Aux (Even)
Stereo Delay
Mono Delay
Chorus
Pitch Shift
Dense Reverb
Lush Reverb
From DCA Masters
Aux (Odd)
Ch Fader
Sub-Groups (even) *
Meter
Sub-Groups (odd) *
Main Outputs
FX Return
Low Cut
PEQ
Gain
Gain
Balance
Mute
Assign
SUM
RTA
Aux Send (Stereo)
Post Fdr
Pre Fdr
Pre Dyn
Pre all
Balance
Mute
Aux Send (Mono)
Post Fdr
Pre Fdr
Pre Dyn
Pre all
SUM
Mute
Pre
Cue
Post
1001108-01-F
* TouchMix-30 only
R
135
Cue
L
R
To Multi-Track
L
FX
Mute
Logic
Aux (Even)
Multi-Track Mode
TouchMix-30: Tracks 31/32
TouchMix-16: Tracks 21/22
TouchMix-8: Tracks 13/14
Stereo MP3 Mode
All models: From USB drive
DAW Mode*
TouchMix-30: DAW channels 31/32
From DCA Masters
Aux (Odd)
Ch Fader
Source
Sub-Groups (even) *
Meter
Sub-Groups (odd) *
Main Outputs
2-Track Playback
L
R
To Multi-Track
Cue
FX
Aux (Even)
Aux (Odd)
R
Sub-Groups (even) *
L
Sub-Groups (odd) *
Main Outputs
RTA (Real Time Analyzer)
Main L/R
From Talkback
Talkback
Follow Cue
Aux
TouchMix-30: 2 instances of the RTA
TouchMix-8 & 16: 1 instance of the RTA
* TouchMix-30 only
1001108-01-F
136
®
Contact QSC
QSC, LLC
Mailing Address: 1675 MacArthur Boulevard
Costa Mesa, CA 92626-1468 U.S.
Main Number: +1.714.754.6175
World Wide Web: www.qsc.com
Sales & Marketing:
Voice: +1.714.957.7100 or
1.800.854.4079 toll free (U.S. only)
FAX: +1.714.754.6174
e-mail: [email protected]
QSC Customer Support
Application Engineering and Technical Services
(Monday – Friday 7 AM to 5 PM PST (Excludes Holidays)
Voice +1.714.957.7150
1.800.772.2834 toll free (U.S. only)
FAX +1.714.754.6173
QSC Self-Help Portal
Access our Self-Help Portal for additional information, FAQs, and
documents. You may also register or login to open a case with
QSC Technical Services.
https://qscprod.force.com/selfhelpportal/s/
© 2016 – 2019 QSC, LLC. All rights reserved. QSC, the QSC logo, and TouchMix are registered trademarks of QSC, LLC in the U.S. Patent and Trademark office and
other countries. iPad, iPhone, iOS, and Bonjour are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. Microsoft is a
trademark of Microsoft Corporation. PreSonus and FaderPort are trademarks of PreSonus Audio Electronics, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
http://patents.qsc.com.
">